Home

Lexmark 34TT001 User's Manual

1. By default Collate is set to On If you do not want to collate your copies then change the setting to Off 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt enter the number of copies gt Collate gt Off gt ZS gt Copy It Placing separator sheets between copies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Separator Sheets Note Set Collate to On to place the separator sheets between copies If Collate is set to Off then the separator sheets are added to the end of the print job 3 Select one of the following Between Copies Between Jobs Copying 99 e Between Pages Off 4 Touch ZS gt Copy It Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet In order to save paper you can copy either t
2. Open each tray and then remove any jams Open each tray and then remove any jams Multipurpose feeder Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder and then remove the jammed paper Automatic Document Feeder ADF Open the ADF cover and then remove any jammed paper Open the duplex cover andthen remove the jammed paper Scanner cover Open the scanner cover and then remove any jammed paper 255 Clearing jams 200 201 paper jams Paper jam in the toner cartridge area 1 Open the printer top access cover CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching it 2 Open the front door Warning Potential Damage To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units do not leave the front door open for more than 10 minutes 3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull the paper up and out to remove it from behind the toner cartridge area Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 256 4 Close the front door and then close the top access cover 5 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Paper jam under the photoconductor units 1 Ope the printer top access cover A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool befor
3. gt Supplies Menu gt Replace Supply 2 Touch the buttons that indicate which of the four photoconductors you replaced e All e Cyan Photoconductor e Magenta Photoconductor e Yellow Photoconductor Black Photoconductor 3 When color photoconductor replaced appears touch Yes 4 Touch to return to the home screen When a replace or low message appears Follow this procedure when the photoconductors are replaced and 84 Replace color photoconductor 84 color photoconductor nearly low or84 color photoconductor lowstill appears 1 From the home screen navigate to Status Supplies gt Supply Replaced 2 When Replaced color photoconductor appears touch Yes Notes e All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time for optimum print quality Ready appears when the counter is reset Moving the printer Before moving the printer CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet e Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it e Use the handholds located on both sides and rear of the printer to lift it e Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down Maintaining the printer 250 e Before setting up the printer make sure there is adequate clearance around it
4. 3 Lower the scanner unit Poor copy quality These are some examples of poor copy quality e Blank pages e Checkerboard pattern e Distorted graphics or pictures e Missing characters e Faded print 290 Troubleshooting 291 Dark print e Skewed lines e Smudges e Streaks e Unexpected characters e White lines in print Try one or more of the following CLEAR ANY ERROR MESSAGES Check the display and clear any error messages REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE When the print remains faded replace the toner or print cartridge CLEAN THE SCANNER GLASS The scanner glass may be dirty Clean the scanner glass with a clean lint free cloth dampened with water For more information see Cleaning the scanner glass on page 229 ADJUST THE TONER DARKNESS OF THE COPY Adjust the toner darkness from the Copy menus MMIAKE SURE THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT IS SATISFACTORY Check the quality of the original document PLACE THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT PROPERLY Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner MAKE SURE TO USE THE APPROPRIATE Copy SETTINGS When patterns moir appear in the output e On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being scanned e From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Sharpness gt lower the Sharpness setting On the Copy s
5. 4 Remove the pick roller assembly 5 Wipe the surface of both pick rollers Maintaining the printer 231 6 Replace the pick roller assembly 7 Wipe the entire surface under the ADF cover including the two small white rollers 8 Wipe the separator pad and then wipe the pick pad Maintaining the printer 9 Pull the flap up as shown and then wipe the sensor behind it Cleaning the printhead lenses Clean the printhead lenses when you encounter print quality problems 1 Open the top access cover and then open the front door 232 Maintaining the printer 233 Warning Potential Damage To avoid overexposing the photoconductors do not leave the front door open for more than 10 minutes 2 Remove all four toner cartridges Note Do not remove the photoconductors for this procedure 3 Locate the four printhead lenses 4 Clean the lenses using compressed air Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the printhead lenses Doing so may cause damage 5 Reinstall the toner cartridges Maintaining the printer 234 6 Close the front door and then close the top access cover Checking the status of parts and supplies A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required For more information see Supplies menu on page 134 Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel From the home sc
6. Copy to paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document information on your copy Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1 touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1 e Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change e Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document Sides Duplex Use this option to select duplex settings You can print copies on one or two sides make two sided copies duplex of two sided original documents make two sided copies from one sided original documents or make one sided copies simplex from two sided original documents Collate This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document The factory default setting for Collate is on the output pages of your copies will be ordered 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 If you want all the copies of each page to remain together turn Collate off and your copies will be ordered 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 Content This option lets you set the original document type and source Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphics e Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphic
7. Fuser 40X8112 100 V 40X8110 115 V 40X8111 230 V Transfer module 40X8307 Ordering a waste toner bottle A message on the printer display appears when the waste toner bottle needs to be replaced For information on replacing the waste toner bottle see the instruction sheet that came with the supply Note Waste toner bottle reuse is not recommended Recommended part number Part name Part number Waste toner bottle C734X77G Ordering ADF replacement parts Order ADF replacement parts if you experience problems with paper double feeding or failing to feed through the ADF For information on replacing the ADF parts see the instruction sheets that came with the parts Recommended part numbers Part name Part number ADF pick assembly 40X5188 Separator pad 40X5187 ADF pick pad 40X5189 Ordering a photoconductor A message will appear on the printer display when a photoconductor needs to be replaced For information on replacing a photoconductor see the instruction sheet that came with the supply Recommended part numbers Part name Part number Photoconductor C734X20G Photoconductor Multi Pack C734X24G Notes e All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time Maintaining the printer 237 e Reset the maintenance counter back to zero after installing the four new photoconductors Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies Lexmark printers parts and supplies are designed to
8. Note Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time 4 Touch the name of the person you want to send the fax to and then touch Done gt Fax It Customizing fax settings Changing the fax resolution Settings range from Standard fastest speed to Super Fine slowest speed but best quality 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number gt Options 4 From the Resolution area touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want 5 Touch Fax It Faxing 120 Making a fax lighter or darker 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number gt Options 4 From the Darkness area touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax 5 Touch Fax It Sending a fax at a scheduled time 1
9. e Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 5 Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Configuring printer hard disk encryption Enable the hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Securing the printer 226 Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Security gt Disk Encryption Note Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed 3 From the Disk encryption menu select Enable Notes e Enabling disk encryption will erase the content of the printer hard disk e Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer
10. e Lift the printer off the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer s authorized replacement Warning Potential Damage Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty Moving the printer to another location The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions e Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer Any cart used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options Keep the printer in an upright position e Avoid severe jarring movements Shipping the printer When shipping the printer use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit Managing the printer 251 Managing the printer Finding advanced networking and administrator information This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server For more advanced system support tasks see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Checking the virtual display 1 Open an Embedded Web Server associated with your printer Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web brows
11. e On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs Set the network address information for an external print server Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Set the netmask information for an external print server Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Set the gateway information for an external print server Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Note This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed Understanding the printer menus 156 Use To Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL
12. 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog Solving color quality problems FAQ about color printing What is RGB color 320 Red green and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature For example red and green can be combined to create yellow Televisions and computer monitors create colors in this manner RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red green or blue needed to produce a certain color What is CMYK color Cyan magenta yellow and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature For example cyan and yellow can be combined to create green Printing presses inkjet printers and color laser printers create colors in this manner CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of cyan magenta yellow and black needed to reproduce a particular color Troubleshooting 321 How is color specified in a document to be printed Software programs typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations Additionally they allow users to modify the color of each object in a document For more information see the software program Help topics How does the printer know what color to print
13. LEXMARK X746x X748x User s Guide April 2012 Machine type s 7526 Model s 576 776 www lexmark com Contents 2 Contents Sarety INTONA O esecaseceescoccacsosasesetcseteusccenacsevdsdeveanstcwesseewsecdoessavemevesenevessuoan Learning about the printer sessessesseesessoessesoessessesossssssoesoesoessessessessoeseesee J Finding information about the printer sssssesesesessceserrsresressrrsrrssereressrrssresrrererereseesseossrssreerrserserrrerreeene 9 Selecting a location for the Printe oaniersssisssescmansensadvsececesatnanvatescnee sacneusaceeaedesninresiudbsavenddaneasbibsaneereleanedesttes 10 P CON U ONE ea E E E TE E A E a 11 Understanding the ADF and scanner glaSS usssesseeseessensesssrrrerrerererrsresrersrrsserssresererereresseesseeseresreesene 13 Usme the printer Control pane bea ssacesngsescncarven nee aten e EEA ENEE ST 14 Understanding the home SCreen cscscscssscsssccccccccscscscscscsccceccccscscscscsese LO Understanding the HOME SCIEN cccsscccssccceececsscceeeceseeceeececseeceuceeeueecenecseececseeeseeceesuetsegeeeeeesenegeeseagess 16 Usne the touchscreen UL CONG erien En ENTE EEE eee acer ene ueaes 18 Setting up and using the home screen applicationS sesssessessescescecscesceee 20 Accessing the Embedded Web SEVEN scssrsccsenseeteveatavesakesateasasesuaienevbeatadlestaaoedinssiabdehendecdtedswetsetedanacsbauuiak 20 Showing or hiding icons on the home SCKL
14. Note The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the Forward to menu 6 Click Submit Scanning 125 Scanning Using Scan to Network Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support person After the destinations shared network folders have been established on the network the setup process for the application involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using its Enbedded Web Server For more information see Setting up Scan to Network on page 21 Scanning to an FTP address Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol FTP server Only one FTP address may be used at a time Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person the name of the destination becomes available as a shortcut number or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon Creating shortcuts Instead of typing the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to an FTP server you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Se
15. Scanning 128 Color This option enables or disables color for the scanned image Resolution This option adjusts the output quality of your file Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation and Binding e Sides Duplex Specifies if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned e Orientation Specifies the orientation of the original document and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the orientation e Binding Specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Content This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphics e Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art e Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations e Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos e Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other e
16. The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc is a product of Agfa Corporation Notices 326 Palatino Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Stempel Garamond Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Taffy Agfa Corporation Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc Univers Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners AirPrint AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc Federal Communications Commission FCC compliance information statement This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interferen
17. When a user prints a document information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer The color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of cyan magenta yellow and black toner needed to produce the desired color The object information determines the application of color conversion tables For example it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to text while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images Why doesn t the printed color match the color see on the computer screen The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard computer monitor However because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors there are many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions For recommendations on how the printer color sample pages may be useful in solving certain color matching problems see the question How can match a particular color such as a corporate logo The printed page appears tinted Can adjust the color Sometimes a printed page may appear tinted for example everything printed seems to be too red This can be caused by environmental conditions paper type lighting conditions or user preference In these instances adjust the Color Balance setting to create a more preferable color Col
18. e Memory cards Printer memory Flash memory Fonts e Firmware cards Bar Code IPDS PrintCryption Printer hard disk e Lexmark Internal Solutions Ports ISP RS 232 C Serial ISP Parallel 1284 B ISP MarkNet N8250 802 11 b g n Wireless ISP MarkNet N8130 10 100 Fiber ISP MarkNet N8120 10 100 1000 Ethernet ISP Note An external kit is needed to support the ISP Additional printer setup 26 Accessing the system board A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 1 Remove the system board cover a Turn the screws on the cover counterclockwise to loosen them but do not remove them Additional printer setup 27 b Slide the cover slightly up until each screw is in the keyhole TIN A F XX N N TN N Sas Sarees eae Sasa SS See 3 A A AA N A A N N N N Ni N N N N N N N 2 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board c Pull the cover to remove
19. AOINE 2XETIKE2 AIATA El2 TH OAHTIA 1999 5 EK EAAnvikh ME THN NAPOYZA H LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC AHAQNEI OTI AYTO TO NPOION Notices 337 English Hereby Lexmark International Inc declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Espanol Por medio de la presente Lexmark International Inc declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Eesti Kaesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International Inc et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999 5 EU pohinouetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele s tetele Suomi Lexmark International Inc vakuuttaa t ten ett t m tuote on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sit koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Magyar Alul rott Lexmark International Inc nyilatkozom hogy a term k megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b eldirasainak slenska H r me l sir Lexmark International Inc yfir v a essi vara er samr mi vi grunnkr fur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru tilskipun 1999 5 EC Con la presente Lexmark International Inc dichiara che questo questo prodotto conforme ai requisiti Par la pr sente L
20. Applies color correction to approximated EuroScale color output Vivid CMYK Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color correction setting Off No color correction is implemented How can I match a particular color such as a corporate logo From the printer Quality menu nine types of Color Samples sets are available These are also available from the Color Samples page of the Embedded Web Server Selecting any sample set generates a multiple page printout consisting of hundreds of colored boxes Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box depending on the table selected The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box through the selected color conversion table By examining Color Samples sets a user can identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color The color combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software program For more information see the software program Help topics Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the selected color conversion table for the particular object Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color matching problem depends on the Color Correction setting being used Auto Off or Manual the type of object being printed text graphics or images and how the color of the object is specified in the software program RGB or CMYK combinatio
21. Facilities may not exist in your area When you return a cartridge to Lexmark you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in Lexmark will recycle the box Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label You can also do the following 1 Visit our Web site at www lexmark com recycle 2 From the Toner Cartridges section select your country or region from the list 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Securing the printer 223 Securing the printer Locking the system board To limit access to the system board attach a security lock to the printer in the location identified in the illustration The printer is compatible with most laptop computer security locks l mi y Statement of Volatility Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings an
22. The word you pick will appear faintly in large print across each page Note A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person When a custom overlay is created a button with an icon of that overlay will be available e Paper Saver Use to print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page Paper Saver is also called N up printing The N stands for Number For example 2 up would print two pages of your document on a single page and 4 up would print four pages of your document on a single page Touching Print Page Borders adds or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page Separator Sheets Use to place a blank piece of paper between copies pages or print jobs The separator sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on Save As Shortcut This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut by assigning a number E mailing 104 E mailing Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings You can use the printer to e mail scanned documents to one or more recipients There are three ways to send an e mail from the printer You can type the e mail address use
23. Wrap over oldest entries is the factory default setting The value of the Admin s e mail address setting can be a single e mail address or a comma delimited list of e mail addresses Digitally sign exports determines if the printer automatically signs each exported security log Off is the factory default setting Severity of events to log records the severity value of each event 4 is the factory default setting Remote Syslog non logged events determines if the printer sends events to the remote server that have a severity level greater than the value of the Severity of events to log setting No is the factory default setting E mail log cleared alert determines if the printer sends an e mail to the administrator every time a log is deleted via printer control panel or EWS No is the factory default setting E mail log wrapped alert determines if the printer sends the administrator an e mail when log entries are wrapping No is the factory default setting full alert level determines if the space occupied by log equals or exceeds the value of the full alert level 90 is the factory default setting E mail full alert determines if the printer sends the administrator an e mail when the log fills a certain amount of its allotted space No is the factory default setting E mail log exported alert determines if the printer sends the administrator an e mail when there is
24. http support lexmark com Notices 324 Notices Product information Product name Lexmark X746x X748x Machine type 7526 Model s 576 776 Edition notice April 2012 The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in later editions Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time References in this publication to products programs or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates Any reference to a product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other
25. surface 5 Load the paper stack toward the back of the tray with the recommended printable side faceup Notes e When loading preprinted letterhead for one sided printing place the header faceup toward the front of the tray e When loading preprinted letterhead for two sided printing place the header facedown toward the rear of the tray One sided printing Two sided Duplex printing Note Make sure paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the left side of the tray Warning Potential Damage Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage Loading paper and specialty media 6 Insert the tray 7 From the printer control panel verify the paper size and paper type setting for the tray based on the paper you loaded Loading the optional 550 sheet special media tray The optional 550 sheet special media tray Tray 2 supports narrow paper sizes such as envelopes and A6 63 Loading paper and specialty media 64 Ca fieran suae a secondary erein ie Ca wansi CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each paper drawer or tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed Notes e For instructions on loading paper sizes larger than A6 and envelopes see Loading the standard or optional 550 sheet tray on page 59 e For a complete list
26. the dropout Notes e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specify the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Create a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Create a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Specify whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of sharpness of a scanned image Note 3 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Temperature 4to 4 Flash Drive menu Scan Settings Use Format PDF pdf Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version 1 2 1 6 A 1a Content Type Text Photo Photo Text Graphics Content Source Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Black and White Laser Resolution 150 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi 75 dpi 197 Enable the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Specify the format of the file to be sent through FTP Note PDF pdf is the factory default s
27. 1 400 Orientation Portrait Landscape Margin Size 8 255 mm Backgrounds Do Not Print Print Image menu Use Auto Fit On Off Invert On Off Scaling Anchor Top Left Best Fit Anchor Center Fit Height Width Fit Height Fit Width 215 Set the default font size for HTML documents Notes e 12 pt is the factory default setting e Font size can be increased in 1 point increments Scale the default font for HTML documents Notes e 100 is the factory default setting e Scaling can be increased in 1 increments Set the page orientation for HTML documents Note Portrait is the factory default setting Set the page margin for HTML documents Notes e 19 mm is the factory default setting e Margin size can be increased in 1 mm increments Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents Note Print is the factory default setting Select the optimal paper size scaling and orientation Note On is the factory default setting It overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images Invert bitonal monochrome images Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images Scale the image to fit the selected paper size Notes e Best Fit is the factory default setting e When Auto Fit is set to On Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit Understanding the printer menus 216 Orientation Set the image orientation Portrai
28. 1 sided 2 sided Duplex Binding Long Edge Short Edge Create a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Create a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Specify whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image Note 3 is the factory default setting Enable the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Specify a default number of copies for each print job Note 1 is the factory default setting Set a default paper source for all print jobs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Specify whether copies are printed in color or black and white Note Color is the factory default setting Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies Note On is the factory default setting Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page Note 1 sided is the factory default setting Define the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page Notes e Long Edge ass
29. 37 removing 41 troubleshooting 304 wiping 225 printer hard disk encryption 225 printer hard disk memory erasing 225 printer information where to find 9 printer messages 1565 Emulation error load emulation option 286 280 06 Paper missing 285 29y xx Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job 285 31 xx Missing or defective color cartridge 277 32 xx color cartridge part number unsupported by device 277 34 Incorrect paper size open src 277 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 277 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 278 37 Insufficient memory to collate job 277 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 278 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 278 38 Memory full 278 39 Complex page some data may not have printed 278 Index 51 Defective flash detected 278 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 278 53 Unformatted flash detected 279 54 Network x software error 279 54 Serial option x error 279 54 Standard network software error 279 55 Unsupported option in slot x 279 56 Parallel port x disabled 280 56 Serial port x disabled 280 56 Standard USB port disabled 280 56 USB port x disabled 280 57 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 280 58 Input config error 280 58 Too many disks installed 281 58 Too many flash options installed 281 58 Too many trays attached 281 59 Inc
30. Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax 2 Click and then click the IP tab 3 Type the printer IP address in the address field and then click Add Note View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Reports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 In Mac OS X version 10 4 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities 2 Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center 3 From the Printer List click Add and then click IP Printer 4 Type the printer IP address in the address field and then click Add Note View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Reports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e For AppleTalk printing Note Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer In Mac OS X version 10 5 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax 2 Click and then navigate to AppleTalk gt select the printer from the list gt Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the Printer List click Add Click the Default Browser tab gt More Printers From the first pop up menu select AppleTalk From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk Zone N HO U BW N Select the print
31. Auto IP Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Enable FTP TFTP Enable the built in FTP server which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer Yes Protocol No Note Yes is the factory default setting Enable HTTP Server Enable the built in Web server Embedded Web Server When enabled you can Yes monitor and manage the printer remotely using a Web browser No Note Yes is the factory default setting WINS Server Address View or change the current WINS server address Enable DDNS View or change the current DDNS setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Enable mDNS View or change the current mDNS setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No DNS Server Address View or change the current DNS server address Enable HTTPS View or change the current HTTPS setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Understanding the printer menus 150 IPv6 menu To access the menu navigate to any of the following e Network Ports menu gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt IPv6 e Network Ports menu gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt IPv6 Note This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers Enable IPv6 in the printer Note On is the factory default setting Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provi
32. Close the front door and then close the top access cover 5 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 202 203 paper jams If the jammed paper is visible in the standard exit bin then firmly grasp the paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 261 Paper jam in the fuser area 1 Open the printer top access cover AN CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching it 2 Open the front door Warning Potential Damage To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units do not leave the front door open for more than 10 minutes 3 Determine where the jammed paper is located and then remove it a Ifthe jammed paper is visible under the fuser then firmly grasp the paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed b Ifthe jammed paper is visible at the top paper guide in the fuser assembly then firmly grasp the paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams c Ifthe jammed paper is not visible then remove the fuser unit 1 Turn the screws on the fuser counterclockwise to loosen them UB LT Lp 2 Using the handholds on each side lift and pull the fuser out of the printer A CAUTION HOT SU
33. Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer e Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film e Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine e Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper e Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Scan Preview This option displays the first page of the original document before it is scanned completely When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Scanning 129 Advanced Options Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings e Advanced Imaging Use to adjust the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Negative Image Mirror Image Scan edge to edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature image output settings before sending the image e Edge Erase Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothi
34. Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the parallel port e Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 Serial port x disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the serial port e Make sure the Serial Buffer menu is not set to Disabled 56 Standard USB port disabled Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the USB port e Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 USB port x disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the USB port e Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled 57 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored Something has changed in the printer to invalidate the held jobs Possible changes include e The printer firmware has been updated e Paper input options needed for the print job were removed e The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the USB port The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model Touch Continue to clear the message 58 Input config error 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Che
35. Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Duplex Rough or Cotton as the paper type Off Custom x Loading Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Duplex Custom x as the paper type Off Note Custom x Loading is available only if the custom paper type is Supported Notes e Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menus e Duplex sets the printer default to two sided printing for every print job unless one sided printing is selected from the Print Properties settings in Windows or from the Print Dialog settings in Macintosh e f Duplex is selected then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including one sided print jobs Custom Types menu Custom Type x Associate a paper or specialty media type with a user defined custom name Paper created in the Embedded Web Server or in MarkVision Professional Card Stock Notes Transparency Glossy e Paper is the factory default setting Labels e The custom paper type must be supported in the selected tray or multipur f rin order rint from th rce Vinyl Labels ultipurpose feeder in order to print from that source Envelope Recycled Specify a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus Paper Card Stock Transparency Glossy e The custom paper type must be supported in the selected tray or Labels multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source Notes e
36. For the location select from the following options Top left Top middle Top right Bottom left Bottom middle Bottom right Notes e Off is the factory default setting for the location e All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job Note Off is the factory default setting Specify the custom overlay text Note A maximum of 64 characters is allowed Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document Note On is the factory default setting Copy in a single copy job a document that contains mixed paper sizes Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu appears only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Save custom copy settings as shortcuts Note On is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Automatically center the content on the page Note Off is the factory default setting Enable an equal balance of colors in the output Understanding the printer menus 178 Use To Color Dropout Specify which color to drop during copies and how much to increase or decrease the Color Dropout dropout None Notes Red e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout Green Blue e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Default Red Threshold 0 255 Defaul
37. Hibernate Mode The following are the statuses of the indicator light and the Sleep button e Entering or waking from Sleep mode The indicator light is illuminated solid green The Sleep button is illuminated e Operating in Sleep mode The indicator light is illuminated solid green The Sleep button is illuminated solid amber e Entering or waking from Hibernate mode The indicator light is unilluminated The Sleep button is blinking amber for 0 10 of a second then goes completely unilluminated for 1 9 seconds in pulsing pattern e Operating in Hibernate mode The indicator light is unilluminated The Sleep button is blinking amber for 0 10 of a second then goes completely unilluminated for 1 9 seconds in pulsing pattern SS The following actions wake the printer from Sleep mode Touching the screen or pressing any hard button Opening an input tray cover or door Loading paper into the automatic document feeder ADF Opening the scanner glass cover or lid Sending a print job from the computer e Performing a power on reset POR with the main power switch 3 Keypad Enter numbers letters or symbols Learning about the printer 15 Use the To Dial pause button e Cause a two or three second dial pause in a fax number In the Fax To field a dial pause is represented by a comma Redial a fax number Notes e Pressing dD outside of the F
38. IP address Note This menu item appears only when there is more than one network option installed and only in network printers or printers connected to print servers Shortcut List Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts Fax Job Log Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes Note This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu Fax Call Log Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted received and blocked calls Note This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu Copy Shortcuts Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts E mail Shortcuts Print a report containing information about e mail shortcuts Fax Shortcuts Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer Understanding the printer menus 146 Use Le Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer Print Directory Print a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or in printer hard disk Notes e Job Buffer Size must be set to 100 e Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed correctly and working Asset Report Print a report containing
39. Ib weight paper e Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process e Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces Use papers printed with heat resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers The ink must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without melting or releasing hazardous emissions Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner Inks that are oxidation set or oil based generally meet these requirements latex inks might not When in doubt contact the paper supplier Paper and specialty media guidelines 79 Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without melting or releasing hazardous emissions Using recycled paper and other office papers As an environmentally conscientious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for use in laser electrophotographic printers While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well Lexmark consistently tests papers that represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market This scientific testing is conducted with rigor and discipline Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole including the following e Amount of post consumer waste Lexmark tests up to 100 post consumer waste content e Temperature and humidity conditions Testing chambers si
40. Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number gt Options gt Advanced Options gt Delayed Send Note If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server the Delayed Send button will not appear Faxes waiting for transmission are listed in the Fax Queue 4 Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes If the current time is shown the left arrow is unavailable 5 Touch Fax It Note The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time Viewing a fax log 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Reports gt Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log Blocking junk faxes 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Faxing 121 If you do not know the IP
41. Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Original Size Specify the paper size of the document being scanned Letter Legal Notes Executive e A4 is the international factory default setting Folio e Letter is the US factory default setting Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Mixed Sizes A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Custom Scan Size x Book Original Business Card 3x5in 4x6in Understanding the printer menus Use Sides Duplex Off Long edge Short edge JPEG Quality Best for content 5 90 Text Default 5 90 Text Photo Default 5 90 Photo Default 5 90 E mail images sent as Attachment Web Link Use Multi Page TIFF Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Log Paper Source Tray x Manual Feeder E mail Bit Depth 8 bit 1 bit 191 as Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting e Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape e Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image Notes e Best for content is the factory default setting e 5 reduces the file size and quality of the image 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large
42. Or inquire at your point of purchase Accessing the Embedded Web Server The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer 1 Obtain the printer IP address e From the printer control panel home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu e By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field The Embedded Web Server page appears Showing or hiding icons on the home screen 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Home screen customization A list of basic printer functions appears 3 Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the printer home screen Note Cleared check box items are hidden 4 Click Submit The selected icons appear on the home screen For information about each of these icons see Understanding the home screen on page 16 Setting up and using the home screen applications 21 Activating the home screen applications You
43. Page Note Off by default is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options Off by default On by default Never use Always use Include to field On Include from field On From Include Message field On Message Include Logo On Include Footer x Footer x Fax Send Settings Resolution Specify quality in dots per inch dpi A higher resolution gives better print quality but Standard increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes Fine 200 dpi Note Standard is the factory default setting Super Fine 300 dpi Ultra Fine 600 dpi Understanding the printer menus 181 Use To Original Size Specify the paper size of the original document Mixed Sizes Note Mixed Sizes is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory Letter default setting Legal Executive Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Custom Scan Size x Sides Duplex Specify how text and graphics are oriented on a page Off Long edge Notes Short edge Off is the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Content Type Specify the content of the original document Text Note Text is the factory default setting Graphics Te
44. Press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place Warning Potential Damage Do not press on the center of the printer hard disk Doing so may cause damage to the hard disk o d Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP E gt Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup 39 To install a printer hard disk directly on the system board a Hold the edges of the printed circuit board assembly and then align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the system board Press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place Warning Potential Damage Do not press on the center of the printer hard disk Doing so may cause damage to the hard disk Additional printer setup b Use the two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded 4 Reattach the system board cover 40 Additional printer setup 41 Removing a printer hard disk Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board For more in
45. Prompt for supplies to view all error messages that indicate what supplies are needed to continue processing the current job 1 Order the missing supply immediately 2 Install the supply For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the print job Tray x paper size unsupported The paper size in the specified tray is unsupported Replace it with a supported paper size Unsupported disk An unsupported disk has been inserted Remove the unsupported disk and then install a supported one Weblink server not set up Contact system administrator An error occurred on the Web link server or the Web link server is not configured properly Touch Continue to clear the message If the message appears again then contact your system support person Troubleshooting 277 31 xx Missing or defective color cartridge Try one or more of the following e Install the missing toner cartridge For instructions on removing and installing a cartridge touch More Information e Remove and reinstall the defective toner cartridge Note If the message is not cleared then replace the defective cartridge Touch Continue to clear the message 32 xx color cartridge part number unsupported by device Remove the unsupported toner cartridge and then install a supported one 34 Incorrect paper size open src Try one or more of the following e Load the appropr
46. Specify whether an original document is two sided duplex or one sided simplex 1 sided to 1 sided and then to specify whether the copy should be two sided or one sided 1 sided to 2 sided Notes 2 sided to 1 sided e T ae 7 4 cided to0 sided 1 sided to 1 sided The original document has print on one side and the copy will also have print on one side e 1 sided to 2 sided The original document has print on one side while the copy will have print on both sides e 2 sided to 1 sided tThe original document has print on both sides while the copy will have print on just one side e 2 sided to 2 sided The original document has print on both sides and the copy will also have print on both sides Paper Saver Allow copying of two or four sheets of a document on one page Off Note Off is the factory default setting 2 up Portrait 4 up Portrait 2 up Landscape 4 up Landscape Print Page Borders Specify whether or not a border is printed Note Off is the factory default setting Collate Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 Note On is the factory default setting On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Understanding the printer menus Use Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A4 A5 A6 JIS BS Custom Scan Size x Book Original Business Card 3x5 4x6 ID Card Copy To Source T
47. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers separated by a semicolon Note 9751 12000 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 169 Displayed Information Specify what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the Left side home screen Right side For the Left side and Right side menus select from the following Custom Text x options text entry None IP Address Hostname x Cartridge x Photoconductor Fuser Contact Name Transfer Module Location Date Time mDNS DDNS Service Name Zero Configuration Name Cartridge Level Custom Text x For x Cartridge x Photoconductor Fuser and Transfer Module menus select from the following options When to display Do not display Display Message to Display Default Alternate Default text entry Alternate text entry Notes IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side Date Time is the factory default setting for Right side Off is the factory default setting for Display When Supply Registers Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to Display Understanding the printer menus 170 Displayed Information continued Specify what is displayed for Paper Jam Load Paper and Service Waste Toner Bottle Errors settings Paper Jam Select from the following options Load Paper Activate Service Errors Yes No Type of Message to Display Default Alternate Default Message text entry Alte
48. a log exported No is the factory default setting E mail log settings changed alert determines if the printer sends the administrator an e mail when the value of the Enable Audit Log setting is toggled Understanding the printer menus 165 Set Date and Time menu Use To Current Date and Time View the current date and time settings for the printer Manually Set Date and Time Enter the date and time Notes Date Time is set in YYYY MM DD HH MM SS format e Manually setting the date and time sets Enable NTP to No Time Zone Select the time zone Note GMT is the factory default setting Automatically Observe DST Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time DST start and end times associated with the printer Time Zone setting Note On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time associated with the Time Zone setting Custom Time Zone Setup Select the time zone UTC Offset DST Start Week DST Start DayOff DST Start Month DST Start Time DST End Week DST End Day DST End Month DST End Time DST Offset Enable NTP Enable or disable Network Time Protocol which synchronizes the clocks of printers on a network Note On is the factory default setting NTP Server View the NTP server address Enable Authentication Change the authentication setting to On or Off Notes On e Off is the factory default setting e Ifthe authentication setting is enabled
49. a shortcut number or use the address book Getting ready to e mail Setting up the e mail function 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Default Settings click E mail FTP Settings 4 Click E mail Settings gt Setup E mail Server 5 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information 6 Click Submit Configuring e mail settings 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser E mailing 105 If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt E mail FTP Settings gt E mail Settings 3 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information 4 Click Submit Creating an e mail shortcut Creating an e mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP sectio
50. address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup gt Block No Name Fax Notes This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name In the Banned Fax List field enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to block Canceling an outgoing fax Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning e When using the ADF touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears e When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page Finish the Job appears Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory 1 On the home screen touch Cancel Jobs The Cancel Jobs screen appears 2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel Only three jobs appear on the screen touch the down arrow until the job you want appears and then touch the job you want to cancel 3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears the selected jobs are deleted and then the home screen appears Understanding fax options Content This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document Choose content type from Text Text Ph
51. ae L Faxing 112 Initial fax setup Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission station name identification of the business other entity or individual sending the message and station number telephone number of the sending fax machine business other entity or individual To enter your fax setup information use the printer control panel or use your browser to access the Embedded Web Server and then enter the Settings menu Note If you do not have a TCP IP environment then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup information Using the printer control panel for fax setup When the printer is turned on for the first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time a series of start up screens appear If the printer has fax capabilities then the following screens appear Fax Name or Station Name Fax Number or Station Number 1 When Fax Name or Station Name appears enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes 2 After entering the Fax Name or Station Name touch Submit 3 When Fax Number or Station Number appears enter the printer fax number 4 After entering the Fax Number or Station Number touch Submit Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you d
52. all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page Notes e On is the factory default setting e This menu applies to all scan functions Enable the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Specify a base file name Note A maximum of 53 characters is allowed Copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job Note Off is the factory default setting Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image Specify which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease in the dropout Notes e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specify the contrast of the scanned image Note Best for content is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 200 Mirror Image On Negative Image On Shadow Detail 4 to 4 Scan edge to edge On Sharpness 1 5 Temperature 4 to 4 Print Settings Paper Source Tray x MP Feeder Manual Paper Manual Envelope Color Color Black Only Collate On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 Sides Duplex
53. and a computer e Infrastructure lets the printer access a network using an access point Compatibility Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network 802 11b g Note The 802 11b g n is the factory default setting 802 11b g n Choose Network Select an available network for the printer to use View Signal Quality View the quality of the wireless connection View Security Mode View the encryption method for the wireless network AppleTalk menu Note This menu is available only in printer models connected to a wired network or when an optional network card is installed To access the menu navigate to any of the following e Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt AppleTalk e Network Ports gt Network Setup x gt AppleTalk Activate Enable or disable AppleTalk support Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name Note The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address Note The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Set Zone Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network list of zones available on the network Note The factory default setting is the default zone for the network If no default zone exists then the zone marked with an asterisk is the default setting Understanding the printer menus Standard USB menu PCL SmartSw
54. at least 1 mm 0 04 in away from edges is recommended Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty e f zone coating of the adhesive is not possible then remove a 1 6 mm 0 06 in strip on the leading and driver edge and use a non oozing adhesive e Portrait orientation works best especially when printing bar codes Tips on using card stock Card stock is heavy single ply specialty media Many of its variable characteristics such as moisture content thickness and texture can significantly impact print quality Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities e From the Paper menu set the Paper Type to Card Stock e Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting Be aware that preprinting perforation and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper handling problems Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 220 C 446 F without releasing hazardous emissions e Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer Preprinting introduces semi liquid and volatile components into the printer e Use grain short card stock when possible Printing 92 Canceling a print job Canceling a print job from the printer control panel 1 Touch Cancel Jobs on the touch screen or press X on the keypad 2 Touch the job you want
55. click Refresh or Navigate to Add port gt select a port type gt enter necessary information gt OK f Click Continue 1 If you want to add another printer then click Add Another 2 If you want to make changes then select a printer and then click Edit 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen g Click Finish 3 Set the COM port parameters After installing the printer driver set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver Note Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer a Open the Device Manager 1 Click B or click Start and then click Run 2 Inthe Start Search or Run box type devmgmt msc 3 Press Enter or click OK Look for Ports and then click to expand the list of available ports Right click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer example COM1 Click Properties 0o a oo o On the Port Settings tab set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters in the printer Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings h Click OK and then close all the windows g Printa test page to verify printer installation Additional printer setup 58 Verifying printer setup When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following e Menu settings page Use this page t
56. corner CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 2 From the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting e For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Troubleshooting 293 Solving scanner problems Checking an unresponsive scanner If your scanner is not responding then make sure e The printer is turned on e The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer print server option or other network device e The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker e The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors uninterrupted power supplies or extension cords Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working Once you have checked each of these possibilities turn the printer off and then back on This often fixes the problem with the scanner Scan was not successful These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM Turn off and then restart the computer Sc
57. emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes e Auto is the factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then processes it appropriately When set to On the printer performs NPA processing If the data is not in NPA format it is rejected as bad data When set to Off the printer does not perform NPA processing Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Serial Buffer Set the size of the serial input buffer Disabled Auto 3K to maximum size allowed Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exit
58. encourage the recycling of our products If you have further questions about recycling options visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com for your local sales office phone number Product disposal Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste Consult your local authorities for disposal and recycling options Temperature information Ambient temperature 15 6 32 2 C 60 90 F Shipping and storage temperature 40 to 40 C 40 to 104 F Notices 328 Static sensitivity notice This symbol identifies static sensitive parts Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer ENERGY STAR Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency EPA ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark ENERGY STAR Laser notice The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825 1 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The printer contains internally a Class IIIb 3b laser that is nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655 675 nanometers The laser system and printer are designed so there is never a
59. error message remains the flash memory may be defective and require replacement Change paper source to custom type name Try one or more of the following e From the printer control panel touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray e Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then touch Paper loaded continue e Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays Note This applies only to printers with tray linking capability Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Troubleshooting 271 Change paper source to custom string Try one or more of the following e From the printer control panel touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray e Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then touch Paper loaded continue Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays Note This applies only to printers with tray linking capability Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change paper source to paper type paper size Try one or more of the following e From the printer control panel touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and p
60. even when you are not physically near the printer Using the touch screen buttons Note Your home screen icons and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded solutions Side Duplex Collate Copy from Letter 8 5 x 11 in Copy to O Letter 8 5 x 11 in Plain Paper l Content Color Scale Auto 100 J Text Photo Save As Shortcut i ioe aai PERE fnna Touch Copy It Submit changes made in the copy settings and start the copy job Right arrow Scroll to the right D Understanding the home screen 19 Touch Lo o Return to the home screen Right increase Select a higher value Left decrease Select a lower value Exit from the current screen Open a context sensitive help dialog Save a setting Cancel e Cancel an action or a selection e Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes Reset values on the screen Setting up and using the home screen applications 20 Setting up and using the home screen applications Notes e Your home screen icons and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded applications Some applications are supported only in select printer models e There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase To learn more visit www lexmark com
61. facedown for two sided printing Loading paper and specialty media 71 e Make sure paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the tray Warning Potential Damage Overloading the tray may cause paper jams and possible printer damage 7 Insert the tray Loading the multipurpose feeder The multipurpose feeder can hold approximately 100 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib paper e 10 envelopes e 75 transparencies Note Do not add or remove paper or specialty media while the printer prints from the multipurpose feeder or when the printer control panel indicator light is blinking Doing so may cause a jam Loading paper and specialty media 72 Loading paper and specialty media 73 3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface Envelopes Transparencies Notes e Make sure paper or specialty media does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator e Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time e Paper or specialty media should lie flat and fit loosely in the multipurpose feeder e f the paper or specialty media is pushed too far into the multipurpose feeder then press the paper release lever to remove it Loading paper and specialty media 74 e Load envelopes with the flap on the right side up and the stamp edge entering th
62. is disabled Make sure the analog phone line is plugged into the modem Paper changes needed Try one or more of the following e Touch Use current supplies to clear the message and continue printing Cancel the current print job Remove packaging material area name Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location Remove paper from standard output bin Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin Replace separator pad Install a new separator pad Restore held jobs Try one or more of the following e Touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk e Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored Troubleshooting 276 Scanner ADF Cover Open The ADF cover is open The message clears when the cover is closed Scan Document Too Long The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages Touch Cancel Job to clear the message SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator An error occurred on the SMTP server or the SMTP server is not configured properly Touch Continue to clear the message If the message appears again contact your system support person Some held jobs were not restored Touch Continue to delete the specified job Note Held jobs that are not restored stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible Supply needed to complete job A supply needed to complete the job is missing Try one of the following Touch
63. is in Sleep Mode then the touch screen appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color Press and hold the Sleep button for 3 seconds or longer to enter Hibernate mode Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button on the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode Factory Defaults Return the printer settings to the factory default settings Do Not Restore Notes Restore Now Do Not Restore is the factory default setting Do Not Restore keeps the user defined settings e Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network Ports menu settings All downloads stored in RAM are deleted Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected Copy Settings menu Content Type Specify the content of the original document Text Note Text Photo is the factory default setting Graphics Text Photo Photo Understanding the printer menus 175 Use To Content Source Specify how the original document was produced Black White Laser Note Color Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Specify whether or not copies are printed in color Note On is the factory default setting Allow color copies Enable or disable color in copying Notes e On is the factory default setting e Setting this to Off will hide all color specific menus This setting overrides the Color setting Sides Duplex
64. media guidelines 77 Paper and specialty media guidelines Paper guidelines Paper characteristics The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability Consider these characteristics when evaluating new paper stock Weight The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 220 g m 16 to 58 Ib bond grain long Paper lighter than 60 g m 16 Ib might not be stiff enough to feed properly causing jams For best performance use 75 g m 20 Ib bond grain long paper For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm 7 2 x 10 1 in we recommend 90 g m 24 Ib or heavier paper Note Duplex is supported only for 63 g m 170 g m 17 Ib 45 Ib bond paper Curl Curlis the tendency for paper to curl at its edges Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer where it is exposed to high temperatures Storing paper unwrapped in hot humid cold or dry conditions even in the trays can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems Smoothness Paper smoothness directly affects print quality If paper is too rough toner cannot fuse to it properly If paper is too smooth it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points however smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality Moisture content The amount of moisture in paper affects both
65. must be turned on Troubleshooting 302 MAKE SURE THE NETWORK IS FUNCTIONING AND THE PRINTER CAN COMMUNICATE Verify all network connections and that the network settings of the printer are configured appropriately For information on networking the printer see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD that came with the printer FOR NETWORKS USING LDAP AUTHENTICATION MAKE SURE LDAP SETTINGS HAVE BEEN CONFIGURED CORRECTLY Verify that LDAP settings are configured appropriately in your printer setup and in the setup dialog For more information on LDAP settings contact your system support person MAKE SURE YOU HAVE PERMISSION TO SAVE SCANS TO THIS DESTINATION On the application Edit Destination screen clear the contents of the Path Suffix field or on the destination server change the user home folder to match the contents of the Path Suffix field My MEP troubleshooting Error reading USB drive Some flash drives may not be compatible with the printer At a minimum the flash drive should Be USB 2 0 compatible Support the Full Speed standard low speed devices will not work e Have a USB type A connector e Support the FAT file system NTFS file system not supported For a list of tested and approved flash drives visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Nothing happens when USB drive is inserted If nothing happens within a few seconds after you insert your USB drive into the MFP then use of USB d
66. of supported paper sizes see the Supported paper sizes types and weights section in the User s Guide Loading narrow paper sizes such as envelopes and A6 1 Pullthe tray completely out Note Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display Doing so may cause a jam Loading paper and specialty media 65 2 Squeeze and slide the primary length guide toward you until it stops Notes e The length has a locking device To unlock the length guide slide to the left the button on top of the length guide To lock slide the button to the right when a length has been selected e You can only slide the secondary length guide when the primary length guide reaches the edge of the width guide Loading paper and specialty media 3 Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading Note Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the width guide 66 Loading paper and specialty media 4 Squeeze and slide the secondary length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading 5 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 6 Load the paper stack with the recommended printable side faceup Notes e Load envelopes with the stamp side entering the printer first e Make sure the pa
67. of the fax output Standard Suitable for most documents e Fine 200 dpi Recommended for documents with small print e Super fine 300 dpi Recommended for original documents with fine detail e Ultra fine 600 dpi Recommended for documents with pictures or photos Note Fine 200 dpi and Super fine 300 dpi is displayed when color printing is selected Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document Color This option enables or disables color in faxing Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation and Binding settings e Sides Duplex Use to specify if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax e Orientation Use to specify the orientation of the original document and then changes Sides and Binding to match the orientation Binding Use to specify if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Scan Preview This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the fax When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Faxing 123 Delayed Send This lets you send a fax at a later time or date 1 Set up your fax 2 From the home screen navigate to Delayed Send gt enter the date and time you want to send your fax gt Done Not
68. on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears Once the printer is fully powered up the touch screen displays a list of functions instead of standard home screen icons such as Copy or Fax 3 Touch Disk Encryption gt Enable Note Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk 4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping Notes Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process Doing so may result in loss of data e Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks e A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task After the disk has been encrypted the printer will return to the Enable Disable screen 5 Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Securing the printer 227 Finding printer security information In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer cannot be accessed For more information visit the Lexmark security Web page and see the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide 1 Visit http support lexmark com and then navigate to Tech Library gt Manuals amp Guides 2 Type Embedded Web Server in the keyw
69. or when an optional output bin with an indicator light is installed Set the audio volume for the buttons Notes e On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback e 5 is the factory default setting for Volume Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area Note On is the factory default setting When On is selected bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area Specify whether image background removal is allowed in copy fax e mail FTP or scan to USB jobs Note On is the factory default setting The background of the image will be removed Scan multiple jobs to one file Note On is the factory default setting If On is selected then the Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs in the ADF Notes Job level is the factory default setting e If Job level is selected then the entire job must be rescanned if any pages jam e If Page level is selected then rescan from the jammed page forward Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshes Note 120 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 172 Use Contact Name Specify a contact name for the printer Note The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web Server Location Specify the location of the printer Note The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server Alarms Set an ala
70. page 80 Setting the paper size and type From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Paper Size Type gt select a tray gt select the paper size or type gt Submit Notes e The Paper Size setting is automatically set according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the standard 550 sheet tray Tray 1 and the multipurpose feeder e The Paper Size setting for Tray 1 and the multipurpose feeder must be set manually in the Paper Size menu e The factory default Paper Type setting is Plain Paper e The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays Configuring Universal paper settings The Universal Paper Size is a user defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper Size menu Then specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper e Units of Measure e Portrait Width e Portrait Height Note The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 127 mm 3 x 5in the largest size is 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Universal Setup gt Units of Measure gt select a unit of measure 2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height gt select the width or height gt Submit Loading the standard or optional 550 sheet tray The printer has one standard 550 sheet
71. paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Names 3 Type a name for the paper type and then click Submit 4 Select a custom type and then verify that the correct paper type is associated with the custom name Note Plain Paper is the factory default paper type for all user defined custom names Configuring a custom name If the printer is on a network then you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type x for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Loading paper and specialty media Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e lf you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Types 3 Select a custom name you want to configure select a paper or specialty media type and then click Submit 76 Paper and specialty
72. photoconductor missing 283 84 xx color photoconductor nearly low 283 84 xx Replace color photoconductor 284 840 01 Scanner disabled by admin 286 340 840 02 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists 286 88 Replace color cartridge 284 88 xx Color cartridge critically low 284 88 xx color cartridge low 284 285 88 xx color cartridge nearly low 285 A accessing the Embedded Web Server 20 accessing the system board 26 Active NIC menu 146 adding a date and time stamp 100 ADF copying using 93 ADF parts cleaning 229 replacing 239 ADF pick assembly ordering 236 ADF pick pad ordering 236 adjusting brightness Embedded Web Server 220 printer control panel 220 Adjusting color 270 adjusting copy quality 97 adjusting display brightness 220 adjusting Sleep mode 219 adjusting toner darkness 85 advanced options touch screen copy 103 e mail 110 fax 123 FTP 129 scanning to computer 132 air filter replacing 239 AppleTalk menu 151 application icon is missing 301 attaching cables 44 attaching the system board cover 26 Automatic Document Feeder ADF 13 Index available internal options 25 avoiding paper jams 253 B black and white copying 95 black and white printing 85 blocking junk faxes 120 buttons printer control panel 14 buttons touch screen using 18 C cables Ethernet 44 USB 44 calling customer support 323 canceling print job from computer 92 canc
73. print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period Grain direction Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper Grain is either grain long running the length of the paper or grain short running the width of the paper For 60 to 135 g m 16 to 36 Ib bond paper grain long paper is recommended For papers heavier than 135 g m grain short is recommended Paper and specialty media guidelines 78 Fiber content Most high quality xerographic paper is made from 100 chemically treated pulped wood This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling Unacceptable paper The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer e Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper also known as carbonless papers carbonless copy paper CCP
74. printing 89 Disk corrupted 271 Disk full scan job canceled 271 Index disk wiping 225 Disk Wiping menu 161 display troubleshooting display is blank 286 display shows only diamonds 286 display printer control panel 14 adjusting brightness 220 disposing of printer hard disk 223 distinctive ring service fax connecting to 114 documents printing from Macintosh 84 from Windows 84 duplexing 96 E Eco Mode setting 218 Edit Security Setups menu 159 Embedded Web Server accessing 20 administrator settings 251 checking the status of parts 234 checking the status of supplies 234 creating a fax destination shortcut 117 creating an FTP shortcut 125 creating e mail shortcuts 105 initial fax setup 112 networking settings 251 problem accessing 323 setting up e mail alerts 251 Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide where to find 227 251 emission notices 326 327 330 334 335 encrypting the printer hard disk 225 enlarging a copy 97 envelopes loading 71 tips 90 environmental settings 217 display brightness adjusting 220 Eco Mode 218 Hibernate Mode 220 Quiet Mode 218 Sleep Mode 219 erasing hard disk memory 225 erasing non volatile memory 224 erasing volatile memory 224 Error reading USB drive Remove USB 272 Ethernet networking Macintosh 52 Windows 52 Ethernet port 44 exporting a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 23 exterior of the printer cleaning 228 e mail canceling 108 e mail alerts low supply le
75. protocol Set the network address information for an external print server Note This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Set the netmask information for an external print server Note This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Set the gateway information for an external print server Note This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Note This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off Understanding the printer menus 154 Use To Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the def
76. reading 302 nothing happens when inserted 302 USB port 44 349 USB parallel interface card troubleshooting 305 using Forms and Favorites 84 using Hibernate Mode 220 using Max Speed and Max Yield 85 using shortcuts sending fax 118 using the address book 106 sending fax 119 using the ScanBack Utility 130 using the touch screen buttons 18 Utilities menu 210 V verify print jobs 88 printing from a Macintosh computer 88 printing from Windows 88 viewing reports 251 viewing a fax log 120 virtual display checking using Embedded Web Server 251 volatile memory 223 erasing 224 volatility statement of 223 W waste toner bottle ordering 236 replacing 245 Weblink server not set up Contact system administrator 276 wiping the printer hard disk 225 wired network setup using Macintosh 52 using Windows 52 Wireless menu 150 wireless network configuration information 48 installation using Macintosh 50 installation using Windows 48 wireless network setup in Windows 48 wireless printer setup in Macintosh 50 WS Scan about 22 Index 350 X XPS menu 211
77. scanner cover firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 269 6 Close the scanner cover 7 Reload original documents into the ADF straighten the stack and then adjust the paper guide Troubleshooting 270 Troubleshooting Solving basic printer problems If there are basic printer problems or the printer is unresponsive make sure e The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker e The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors uninterrupted power supplies or extension cords e Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working The printer is turned on Check the printer power switch e The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer print server option or other network device e All options are properly installed e The printer driver settings are correct Once you have checked each of these possibilities turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on This often fixes the problem Understanding printer messages Adjusting color Wait for the process to complete An error has occurred with the USB drive Please remove and reinsert drive Try one or more of the following e Remove and reinsert the flash drive e If the
78. sides and rear of the printer to lift it e Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down e Before setting up the printer make sure there is adequate clearance around it e Lift the printer off the optional tray and set it aside instead of trying to lift the tray and printer at the same time Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer s authorized replacement A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce risk of fire use only the telecommunications RJ 11 cord provided with this product or a UL Listed 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Make sure that all external connections such as Ethernet and telephone system connections are properly installed in their marked plug in ports This product is designed tested and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer s components The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not cut twist bind crush or place heavy objects on the power cord Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls If any of these things happen a risk of fire or electrical shock results Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of such problems R
79. single paper size 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt Mixed Sizes gt Pi gt Copy to gt Letter gt Ai gt Copy It The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on the paper size selected Copying on both sides of the paper duplexing 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy Copying 97 4 From the Sides Duplex area touch the button for your preferred duplexing method The first number represents sides of the original documents the second number represents sides of the copy For example select 1 sided to 2 sided if you have 1 sided original documents and you want 2 sided copies 5 Touch VS and then Copy It Reducing or enlarging copies Cop
80. task requires a flathead screwdriver 2 Unpack the memory card Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card Doing so may cause damage 3 Open the memory card connector latches Additional printer setup 31 4 Align the notch 1 on the memory card with the ridge 2 on the connector 5 Pushthe memory card straight into the connector until it clicks into place and then push the latches to firmly attach the card into the connector 6 Reattach the system board cover Additional printer setup 32 Installing a flash memory or firmware card The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card Only one of each may be installed but the connectors are interchangeable AN CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 1 Access the system board For more information see Accessi
81. then click Continue From the Easy Install screen click Install Type the user password and then click OK All necessary applications are installed in the computer Click Close when installation is complete 2 Add the printer a For IP printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax 2 Click and then click the IP tab 3 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field and then click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities 2 Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center 3 From the Printer List choose Add and then click IP Printer 4 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field and then click Add For AppleTalk printing Note Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer In Mac OS X version 10 5 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax 2 Click and then navigate to AppleTalk gt select the printer from the list gt Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the Printer List click Add Click Default Browser tab gt More Printers From the first pop up menu select AppleTalk From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk Zone Select the printer from the list and then click Add Nn UI BW N Installing the printer o
82. then the printer will ask for the user credentials such as user ID and password Understanding the printer menus 166 Settings menu General Settings menu Use Display Language Set the language of the text appearing on the printer display English Note Not all languages are available for all printers and you may Francais need to install special hardware for those languages to appear Deutsch Italiano Espanol Greek Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Portuguese Suomi Russian Polski Magyar Turkce Cesky Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean Japanese Eco Mode Minimize the use of energy paper or specialty media off Notes Energy e Off is the factory default setting Off resets the printer to its Energy Paper 8y F ap factory default settings Paper e The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer Performance may be affected but print quality is not e Energy Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and specialty media e Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job Performance may be affected but print quality is not ADF Loaded Beep Specify whether or not the ADF sounds a beep when paper is Enabled loaded Disabled Note Disabled is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Quiet Mode On Run Initial setup Yes No 167 Reduce the amount of noise produced by the printer Notes e Off is the factory default
83. this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If you experience trouble with this equipment for repair or warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc at www lexmark com or your Lexmark representative If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved This equipment contains no user serviceable parts For repair and warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc See the previous paragraph for contact information Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment consult your telephone company or a qualified installer Notices 332 Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connect
84. toners and inks software or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD ALL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS PRICES AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE Limitation of liability Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph Lexmark s liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable INNO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS LOST SAVINGS INCIDENTAL DAMAGE OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES This is
85. tray Tray 1 and may have up to four optional 550 sheet trays including the special media tray For narrow paper sizes such as A6 and envelopes use the special media tray For more information see Loading the optional 550 sheet special media tray on page 63 CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each paper drawer or tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed 1 Pull the tray completely out Note Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display Doing so may cause a jam Loading paper and specialty media 2 Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading Note Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the length and width guides 60 Loading paper and specialty media 61 3 Squeeze and slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading Notes e For some paper sizes like letter legal and A4 squeeze and slide the length guide backward to accommodate their length e The length guide has a locking device To unlock the length guide slide to the left the button on top of the length guide To lock slide the button to the right when a length has been selected Loading paper and specialty media 62 4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level
86. true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark Lexmark s and its Suppliers and Remarketers limitations of remedies are not cumulative Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation Additional rights Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights that vary from state to state Index Index Numerics 1565 Emulation error load emulation option 286 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder loading 69 2000 sheet drawer installing 43 200 201 paper jams 255 202 203 paper jams 260 24x paper jam 266 250 paper jam 267 280 06 Paper missing 285 29y xx Close flatbed cover and load Originals if restarting job 285 29y xx paper jams 267 31 xx Missing or defective color cartridge 277 32 xx color cartridge part number unsupported by device 277 34 Incorrect paper size open src 277 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 277 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment Operation 278 37 Insufficient memory to collate j
87. used by a previous print job This method does not permit the file system to reuse this space until it has been cleared Notes e Single pass is the factory default setting e Only automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to turn the printer off for an extended amount of time e Wipe highly confidential information using only the Multiple pass method Allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first Notes e Single pass is the factory default setting e Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple pass method only Allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first Note Single pass is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 163 Security Audit Log menu Use Export Log Enable an authorized user to export the security log Notes e To export the log from the printer control panel attach a flash drive to the printer e To export the log from the Embedded Web Server download the log to a computer Delete Log Specify whether audit logs are deleted Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Understanding the printer menus 164 Use ae Configure Log Specify whether and how the audit logs are created Enable Audit Yes Notes e Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and remote syslog No is the No Enable Remo
88. width allowed e The width can be increased in 0 01 inch or in 1 mm increments Portrait Height Set the height for a portrait page orientation 3 48 inches 76 1219 mm Notes e 14 inches is the US factory default setting 356 mm is the international factory default setting e Ifthe specified height exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum height allowed The height can be increased in 0 01 inch or in 1 mm increments Understanding the printer menus 145 Feed Direction Specify the feed direction Short Edge Notes Long Edge e Short Edge is the factory default setting e Long Edge appears only when the paper or specialty media can be loaded in either direction Reports menu Reports menu Menu Settings Page Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays installed memory total page count alarms timeouts printer control panel language TCP IP address status of supplies status of the network connection and other information Device Statistics Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details about printed pages Network Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address Note This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers Network x Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP
89. with a semicolon 4 Assign a shortcut number If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 5 Click Add Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen touch Fax and then enter the fax number To create a group of fax numbers touch Next number and then enter the next fax number O 2 Touch a 3 Type a unique name for the shortcut and then touch Done 4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK If the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information Sending a fax Sending a fax using the printer control panel 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Faxing 118 3 From the home screen touch Fax 4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad 5 To add recipients touch Next Number and then enter the recipient s telephone number or shortcut number or search the address book Note To place a dial pause within a fax number press AD The dial pause appears as a comma in the Fax to field Use this feature if you need to
90. you are going to scan When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes letter and legal size pages Resolution This option adjusts the output quality of your file Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size Color This option enables or disables color for the scanned image Content This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphics Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos e Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer e Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film e Magazine Use when t
91. 0 230400 and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the Standard Serial menu These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1 Serial Option 2 or Serial Option 3 menus Specify the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame Note 8 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 158 Parity Set the parity for serial input and output data frames Even Note None is the factory default setting Odd None Ignore Honor DSR Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal Notes e Off is the factory default setting e DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables The serial port uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical noise in the serial cable The electrical noise can cause stray characters to print Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing SMTP Setup menu Use Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server gateway and port information Primary SMTP Gateway Port Note 25 is the default SMTP gateway port Secondary SMTP Gateway Secondary SMTP Gateway Port SMTP Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to 5 30 send an e mail Note 30 is the factory default setting Reply Address Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e mail sent by the printer Use SSL Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the Disabled SMTP server Negotiate Notes R
92. 00 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi 75 dpi kness 1 9 Orientation Portrait Landscape Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Mixed Sizes A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Custom Scan Size x Book Original Business Card 3x5in 4x6in Sides Duplex Off Long edge Short edge 194 EE Specify whether or not copies are printed in color Note On is the factory default setting Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting Lighten or darken the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Specify the orientation of the scanned image Note Portrait is the factory default setting Specify the paper size of the original document Notes Letter is the US factory default setting e A4 is the international factory default setting Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting e Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape e Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Understanding the printer menus JPEG Quality Best for content 5 90 Text Default 5 90 Text Photo Default 5 90 Photo Default 5 90 Use Multi Page TIFF Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Log Pa
93. 16 subject and message information adding to e mail 107 Substitute Size menu 140 supplies checking status 234 checking from printer control panel 234 checking using the Embedded Web Server 234 conserving 217 storing 237 using genuine Lexmark 237 using recycled paper 217 Supplies menu 134 supplies ordering ADF pick assembly 236 ADF pick pad 236 fuser 235 photoconductors 236 separator pad 236 toner cartridges 235 transfer module 235 waste toner bottle 236 supplies replacing hotoconductors 246 waste toner bottle 245 Supply needed to complete job 276 supported file types 87 supported flash drives 87 supported paper sizes 81 system board accessing 26 locking 223 system board cover attaching 26 reattaching 26 T TCP IP menu 148 telecommunication notices 331 332 333 334 tips card stock 91 envelopes 90 labels paper 91 letterhead 89 transparencies 90 toner cartridges ordering 235 recycling 222 replacing 237 348 toner darkness adjusting 85 toner fog or background shading appears on the page 318 toner rubs off 319 toner specks 320 touch screen buttons 18 transfer module ordering 235 transparencies copying on 94 loading 71 printing on 90 tips on using 90 Tray x paper size unsupported 276 trays linking 74 75 unlinking 74 75 troubleshooting A network destination stopped working or is invalid 300 an application error has occurred 298 application icon is missing 301 cannot o
94. 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Note Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same Failure to set the proper size may result to a cropped image 3 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient 4 Enter the e mail address or press and then enter the shortcut number To enter additional recipients touch Next Address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add Note You can also enter an e mail address using the address book 5 Touch Done gt Send It Sending an e mail using a shortcut number 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Press enter the shortcut number using the keypad and then touch ZS To enter additional recipients touch Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add 4 Touch Send It Sending an e mail using the address book 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place
95. 289 unexpected page breaks occur 290 troubleshooting print quality black streaks on a page 316 blank pages 313 characters have jagged edges 307 clipped images 307 fine horizontal lines 307 gray background 308 light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints 309 poor transparency quality 320 print irregularities 310 print is too dark 311 print is too light 311 repeating defects 313 shadow images appear on prints 314 skewed print 315 solid color pages 316 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 317 streaked vertical lines on prints 318 toner fog or background shading on the page 318 toner rubs off 319 toner specks 320 white streaks on a page 316 troubleshooting printer options 2 000 sheet drawer problems 304 cannot detect flash memory card 304 cannot detect printer hard disk 304 internal print server 305 Internal Solutions Port 305 memory card 304 option does not work 303 paper tray problems 303 USB parallel interface card 305 troubleshooting scan cannot scan from a computer 294 partial document or photo scans 294 scan was not successful 293 scanner unit does not close 290 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 293 U understanding the home screen buttons and icons 16 Universal Paper Size setting 59 Universal paper size 144 Universal Setup menu 144 unlinking trays 74 75 Unsupported USB device please remove 2 2 updating options in printer driver 47 usb drive error
96. 5024 This product is not intended to be used in residential domestic environments This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Industry Canada compliance statement This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Standard ICES 003 Notices 331 Avis de conformit aux normes de l industrie du Canada Cet appareil num rique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux quipements pouvant causer des interf rences NMB 003 Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal equipment such as facsimile Notice to users of the US telephone network FCC requirements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments ACTA On the back of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQH HHTXXXX If requested this number must be provided to your telephone company This equipment uses the RJ 11C Universal Service Order Code USOC jack A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules a
97. A8241 for A4 size transparencies Tips on using envelopes Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities Use envelopes designed specifically for laser LED printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 220 C 446 F without sealing wrinkling curling excessively or releasing hazardous emissions For best performance use envelopes made from 90 g m 24 Ib bond paper or 25 cotton All cotton envelopes must not exceed 70 g m 20 Ib bond weight Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages To optimize performance and minimize jams do not use envelopes that Have excessive curl or twist Are stuck together or damaged in any way Have windows holes perforations cutouts or embossing Have metal clasps string ties or folding bars Have an interlocking design Have postage stamps attached Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position Have bent corners Have rough cockle or laid finishes Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes Note A combination of high humidity over 60 and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes Printing 91 Tips on using labels Notes e Single sided paper labels designed for laser LED printers are supported for occasional use e t is recommended to print no more than 20 pages of paper la
98. AL INJURY This product uses a laser Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure This product uses a printing process that heats the print media and the heat may cause the media to release emissions You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions AN CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching Use care when you replace a lithium battery CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced Replace it only with the same or an equivalent type of lithium battery Do not recharge disassemble or incinerate a lithium battery Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions and local regulations A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage e Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet e Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it e Use the handholds located on both
99. ARKNESS SETTING Select a lighter Toner Darkness setting e From the printer control panel Quality menu change the setting e For Windows users change the setting from Print Properties e For Macintosh users change the setting from the Print dialog THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the toner cartridge Incorrect margins These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Size setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting e For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog 308 Troubleshooting Light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints Try one or more of the following IMIAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE Replace the defective toner cartridge MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective photoconductor unit MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective transfer module CLEAN THE PRINTHEAD LENSES 1 Open the front door and then the internal cover 2 Locate the printhead wipers 3 Gently pull the printhe
100. Color Dropout Contrast Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you copy the document e Create Booklet Use to create a booklet You can choose between 1 sided and 2 sided Note This option appears only when a print duplexer and printer hard disk are installed e Cover Page Setup Use to set copy cover page and booklet cover page Custom Job Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job e Edge Erase Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan e Header Footer Use to turn on Date Time Page number Bates number or Custom text and prints them in the specified header or footer location e Margin Shift Use to increase the size of the margin of a specified distance by shifting the scanned image This can be useful in providing space to bind or hole punch copies Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of a margin you want If the additional margin is too large then the copy will be cropped e Overlay Use to create a watermark or message that overlays the content of your copy You can choose from Urgent Confidential Copy and Draft or you can enter a custom message in the Enter custom text field
101. DIC UTS KEW Power consumption Product power consumption The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product Note Some modes may not apply to your product The product is generating hard copy output from electronic inputs 560 W Copy The product is generating hard copy output from hard copy original 600 W documents The product is scanning hard copy documents The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time averaged measurements Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Notices 330 Sleep Mode This product is designed with an energy saving mode called Sleep Mode The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time called the Sleep Mode Timeout Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product in minutes By using the configuration menus the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption but may increase the response time of the product Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response but uses more energy Off mode If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of p
102. Delete Current Log Note None is the factory default setting E mail amp Delete Oldest Log Post amp Delete Current Log Post amp Delete Oldest Log Delete Current Log Delete Oldest Log Delete All Logs Delete All But Current URL to Post Logs Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs E mail Address to Send Logs Specify the e mail address to which the device sends job accounting logs Log File Prefix Specify the prefix you want for the log file name Note The current host name defined in the TCP IP menu is used as the default log file prefix Understanding the printer menus 210 Utilities menu Use To Remove Held Jobs Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk Confidential Held Not Restored Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer Bookmarks print jobs on flash drives and other types of held jobs are not affected Notes All e Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the printer hard disk or memory Format Flash Format the flash memory Yes Warning Potential Damage Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is No being formatted Notes Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory No cancels the format request Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in the printer The flash memory option card must not be read write or write protected This m
103. EE N ccccseccesceeseceseccenceceeceenceeuecceeeencesuecseeeceneecnceseetseceseees 20 Activating the home screen APPliCAtIONS cecccescccseccescesecceececssceecceuceesuecsececeaeeesueeeecesneeseetsgeaeeetens 21 Setting up Forms and Favorites sssnesssesssseeresserrserresseresssressrrrrssrerorrresssrossereosssrresterestreesseossssssessseesseeereeeeeee 21 SEEING up Scan to NELWONK ncsirreresnak enn r T a a aa 21 seine uP MINIE e EE A E T E EE A O A 22 Understanding V5 2S Cd lecrraviataccietircnansuutartarsaatencnbeodtsnsanscavaainrintomsateaanobacttaveatiniudaniseudadioneed ianiai i aiiai 22 SEEING up Remote Operator Pane lesrcrcariins saa raa Ena aE 23 Exporting and importing a configuration sesesessseseresrrsressrrsrrserrsevssrssrrsrrrsroserssererrsreserssersereeerererrerrene 23 Additional printer SetUp sessesesescscescsceseeceseececeecscesoscesesoesesseceesecesesoesess 2D Hae WAS Ha OPONE oian AE EAE 25 Installing hardware OPtiONS cccccccccsseccsecccssecceeccesuceceneceeececsseceeeeeeeseeceeeeeeuceceseceeecessueesseeesseueecegeeeaness 42 PAG VS CANON CS ossea EEE E A AAEE E tia auuetesstassesencan 44 CANE UPITNE PANET O N E eE E A E E E eee 46 Ne WOCRINE corr E T E ee E nen eee ee 48 Venna PNE CU e E E 58 Loading paper and specialty IMO CIA nc cccccccccccccccccccccccecccccccccccccccccccccccccceesccsDG Setting the paper size and BY 0G x consssseuctwercscerssanaisawannioasiedaatoscasasatmansaac
104. Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com 2 Navigate to SUPPORT amp DOWNLOADS gt select your printer gt select your operating system 3 Download the printer driver and then install the printer software Updating available options in the printer driver When the printer software and any options are installed it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder a Click a or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type control printers c Press Enter or click OK 2 Select the printer 3 Right click the printer and then select Properties 4 Click the Configuration tab 5 Click Update Now Ask Printer or manually add any installed hardware options under Configuration Options 6 Click Apply For Macintosh users In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax gt select your printer gt Options amp Supplies gt Driver 2 Add any installed hardware options and then click OK In Mac OS X version 10 4 1 From the Finder navigate to Go gt Applications gt Utilities 2 Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center 3 Select the printer Additional printer setup 48 4 From the Printers menu choose Show Info 5 Add any installed hardware options and then click Apply Changes Networking Note A Ser
105. Load paper source with paper size 274 Load paper source with paper type paper size 274 Load Manual Feeder with custom string 274 Load Manual Feeder with custom type name 274 Load Manual Feeder with paper size 274 Load Manual Feeder with paper type paper size 275 loading 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder 69 550 sheet tray standard or optional 59 envelopes 71 letterhead in 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder 69 multipurpose feeder 71 optional 550 sheet special media tray 63 transparencies 1 Index loading the optional special media tray 63 loading the optional tray 59 loading the standard tray 59 lock security 223 locking the system board 223 M making copies using paper from selected tray 95 Max Speed and Max Yield using 85 memory types installed on printer 223 memory card installing 30 troubleshooting 304 Memory full cannot print faxes 275 menu settings page printing 58 menus Active NIC 146 AppleTalk 151 Confidential Print 161 Configure MP 139 Copy Settings 174 Custom Names 144 Custom Scan Sizes 144 Custom Types 143 Default Source 136 diagram of 133 Disk Wiping 161 Edit Security Setups 159 E mail Settings 188 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup 187 Finishing 204 Flash Drive 197 FTP Settings 193 General Settings 166 Help 216 HTML 214 Image 215 IPv6 150 Job Accounting 208 Miscellaneous 160 Network x 146 Network Card 148 Paper Loading 142 Paper Size Type 136 Paper Weight 140 Parall
106. Paper is the factory default setting Vinyl Labels Envelope Understanding the printer menus 144 Custom Scan Sizes menu Custom Scan Size x Specify a custom scan size name scan sizes and options The custom scan size Scan Size Name name replaces Custom Scan Size x in the printer menus Width Notes 1 11 69 inches 25 297 mm Height 1 17 inches 25 432 mm Orientation e 11 69 inches is the US factory default setting for Width 297 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Width e 17 inches is the US factory default setting for Height 432 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Height Portrait e Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation Landscape e Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side 2 scans per side On Custom Names menu Use oe Custom Name x Specify a custom name for a paper type This name replaces Custom Type x in none the printer menus Universal Setup menu Units of Measure Specify the unit of measure Inches Note Inches is the US factory default setting Millimeters is the Millimeters international factory default setting Portrait Width Set the width for a portrait page orientation 3 48 inches 76 1219 mm Notes e 8 5 inches is the US factory default setting 216 mm is the international factory default setting e If the specified width exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum
107. RFACE The fuser might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching it 262 Clearing jams 263 e Pull and then rotate the green rectangular knob clockwise to unlock the top paper guide g Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 264 i Pull and then rotate the green rectangular knob counterclockwise to firmly secure the top paper guide j Reinstall the fuser unit 1 Align the fuser unit using the handholds on each side and then insert it back into the printer 4 Close the front door and then close the top access cover 5 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Clearing jams 265 Paper jam inside the printer top access cover 1 Open the printer top access cover Warning Potential Damage To avoid overexposing the photoconductors do not leave the front door open for more than 10 minutes AN CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching it 2 Open the front door 3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the front door and then close the top access cover 5 From the printer control panel touch Conti
108. SETTINGS Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings Change the Paper Weight setting from Normal to Heavy 2 Before sending the print job specify the correct paper type setting e For Windows users specify the paper type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the paper type from the Print dialog CHECK THE PAPER TEXTURE SETTING From the printer control panel Paper menu make sure the Paper Texture setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder If necessary change the Paper Texture setting from Normal to Rough MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the worn or defective fuser For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part Troubleshooting Toner specks Try one or more of the following IMIAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE Replace the defective or worn cartridges MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective photoconductor unit CALL CUSTOMER SUPPORT Transparency print quality is poor Try one or more of the following CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES Use only transparencies that meet the printer specifications CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting is set to Transparency 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting
109. SS 210 d Industry Canada Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions Suivantes 1 cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d interf rences et 2 il doit accepter toute interf rence re ue y compris celles risquant d alt rer son fonctionnement Cet appareil a t con u pour fonctionner uniquement avec l antenne fournie L utilisation de toute autre antenne est strictement interdite par la r glementation d Industry Canada En application des r glementations d Industry Canada l utilisation d une antenne de gain sup rieur est strictement interdite Pour emp cher toute interf rence radio au service faisant l objet d une licence cet appareil doit tre utilis a l int rieur et loin des fen tres afin de garantir une protection optimale Si le mat riel ou son antenne d mission est install a l ext rieur il doit faire l objet d une licence L installateur de cet quipement radio doit veiller a ce que l antenne soit implant e et dirig e de mani re a n mettre aucun champ HF d passant les limites fix es pour l ensemble de la population par Sant Canada Reportez vous au Code de s curit 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Sant Canada www hc sc gc ca rpb Le terme IC pr c dant le num ro de d accr ditation inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme aux specifications techniques d Industry Canada Taiwan NCC RF notice statement NCC Hu Siriaas fat H Ae De a A USL HZ ONS ET
110. Samples gt Detailed Options 3 Select a color conversion table 4 Enter the RGB or CMYK color number 5 Enter an increment value from 1 255 Note The closer the value is to 1 the narrower the color sample range will appear 6 Click Print Embedded Web Server does not open Try one or more of the following CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTION Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network CHECK THE ADDRESS ENTERED IN THE WEB BROWSER Depending onthe network settings you may need to type https instead of http before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server For more information contact your system support person e Make sure printer IP address is correct TEMPORARILY DISABLE WEB PROXY SERVERS Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server For more information contact your system support person Contacting customer support When you call customer support describe the problem you are experiencing the message on the display and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution You need to know your printer model type and serial number For more information see the label on the inside top front cover of the printer The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page In the U S or Canada call 1 800 539 6275 For other countries or regions visit the Lexmark Web site at
111. Shadow Detail 4to4 Scan edge to edge On Sharpness 1 5 Temperature 4 to 4 Use cc bcc On FTP Settings menu Format PDF pdf Secure PDF pdf TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version 1 2 1 6 A l1a Content Type Text Photo Photo Text Graphics Content Source Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Black and White Laser 193 Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Specify whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image Note 3 is the factory default setting Enable the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Enable the use of the cc and bcc fields Note Off is the factory default setting Specify the format of the file for FTP sending Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Set the version level of the PDF file for FTP sending Note 1 5 is the factory default setting Specify the content of the original document Note Text Photo is the factory default setting Specify how the original document was produced Note Color Laser is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Resolution Dar 150 dpi 2
112. T OV DSR UE SS ESER MA DRR RUST CE DAE HERA SH ee SZ BE a Ra AE Be FR Si fs ERE TLRS RENLBI EA gt IEC B SPE EA o RAME gt TER UE TESS CURR EES BIRRA ERAO ANEMA LRE BLE Re aie H BE E Bcc UZ FIE Notice to users in the European Union Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to Notices 336 electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the ecodesign of energy using products Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 Products equipped with 2 4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximatio
113. TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings Managing the printer 252 3 Under Other Settings click E mail Alert Setup 4 Select the items for notification and type the e mail addresses 5 Click Submit Note For information on setting up the e mail server contact your system support person Clearing jams 253 Clearing jams Carefully select paper and specialty media and load it properly to avoid most jams For more information see Avoiding jams on page 253 If jams do occur follow the steps outlined in this chapter Note Jam recovery is set to Auto by default The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks Avoiding jams Load paper properly e Make sure paper lies flat in the tray Correct paper loading Incorrect paper loading e Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing e Do not load a tray while the printer is printing Load it before printing or wait for a prompt to load it e Do not load too much paper Make sure the stack height does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator e Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly against the paper or envelopes e Push the tray in firmly after loading paper Use recommended paper e Use only re
114. TP logs Notes e Standard Bin is the factory default setting e Bin x only appears only when at least one optional output bin is installed Enable the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Specify a base file name Note The limitation is 53 characters Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Scan Preview On Allow Save as Shortcut Background Removal 4 to 4 Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast 0 5 Best for content Mirror Image On Negative Image On Shadow Detail 4 to 4 Scan edge to edge On Sharpness 1 5 196 Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Notes e Off is the factory default setting e Appears only when a printer hard disk is installed Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses Note On is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Enable an equal balance of colors in the output Specify which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease
115. Timeout 5 255 Print Recovery Disabled Auto Continue 5 255 Print Recovery Jam Recovery Auto Print Recovery Page Protect On 173 Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an end of job message before canceling the remainder of the print job Notes e 90 is the factory default setting e When the timer expires any partially printed page still in the printer is printed and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting e Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional data before canceling a print job Notes 40 is the factory default setting e Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using PostScript emulation This setting has no effect on PCL emulation print jobs Set the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to print other jobs in the print queue Notes e 30 is the factory default setting e This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when not resolved within the specified time period Note Disabled is the factory default setting Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages Notes e Auto is the factory defaul
116. URE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE Replace the worn or defective toner cartridge MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective transfer module For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective fuser For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part Troubleshooting 311 Print is too dark N ABC DEF Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DARKNESS BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST SETTINGS The Toner Darkness setting may be too dark the Brightness setting may be too dark or the Contrast setting may be too high e Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu e For Windows users change these settings from Print Properties e For Macintosh users 1 Choose File gt Print 2 From the Orientation pictures menu choose Printer Features 3 Choose a lower value for the Toner Darkness Brightness and Contrast settings LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder e From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting e For Windows users check this setting from Print Propert
117. Understanding the home screen Understanding the home screen When the printer is turned on the display shows a basic screen referred to as the home screen Touch the home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying faxing or scanning to open the menu screen or to respond to messages Note Your home screen icons and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded solutions Copy E mail Bookmarks Search N A ji Page Change C 1a opy a OPe Language Shortcuts Mii Status Ready Supplies AN Touch Access the printer menus Note These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state FIP Access the File Transfer Protocol FTP menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server Status message bar e Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy Show printer conditions such as Toner Lowor Cartridge Low Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing Status Supplies Display a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue processing Access the messages screen for more information on the message and how to clear it USB or USB Thumbdrive View select print scan or e mail photos and documents from a flash drive Note This button appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or flash drive is connected to the printer Boo
118. Wardihg Taxes ainainen tn E EE AE A E GS 123 SCaNNINE oerein ON E E a a 2 Usine Scan tO NG EWONK Arraroen E A A E AE 125 Scanning toan FIP address orea E a E we neunvauleumsevensnnal anayuctaizein aaneweiees 125 SCan Nine to a ComMmDUter or lash dV Ce adscssat cesta E 129 Understanding the printer Menus cccscsccscscscsccccscsccccccecscscecscssessscscsee LIS MEn aaron a N E O EET 133 SOO SS SG a E E A sas ueretes aneidlvantameteneeind 134 2 OLS alga 2 p Weertenten teen nett A tea On AES nen r On nen eee RCE ONT See re reer Ear er ern ei renee 136 REDON US MENUS esse feck wa cles eect vas waste eae cnct N A tle tude gaen bao meade ET E A OAA ueeata 145 PEON Oi MENU rrura aE T ETE 146 Secun MEN ooe a eves ea ydacae once vevedenteuneniaaead 159 SE CUMS MeNUsrsisisa sees E E a A N a tes 166 Help TMS TN Ul e e a a T 216 Saving money and the environment ssesseessssoessesoesssesessoessessesseesesssees 2 L7 Saving paperand tone ansieae a T ET ee ee 217 SAVING CHCI EVs o a ia ned Coens upstacedrasne uudliens eat uebedeuaas Coast udeetesinincdceunventaacees 218 RECVEIIN Osseo clad shen ee irae E A A E dur lausaentteunsner dade NO 221 Securing ENE OMNIA Ol casein a a a e eo LOCKING the SVSTCIM DOi dreni an e N A 223 STALCIMOIIU Ol VOLI ea a a ta atone eee 223 EFASINE volatile memory oeira eseue lace yandeGaeabeiictelewaa a e EN 224 Erasing NOn Volatile rne MOV ianea A A a a a eT 224 Erasing Printer harddisk Memo neiere a
119. a EE a 225 Configuring printer Nard diSKEncryptiO Meerane ai E N A E T 225 Endine prater security INTOM ON sassrnveirer n TEE E EET 227 Maintaining the printer ssesessessesescesceceeceseecescesceceesescsesceseesescesceceesesseee 22S Cleaning the PNEC DARL orep a a EE T A TETA 228 Checking the status of parts and SUpplieS seureiisiiniinieirisiinreerisisir iiaiai E E 234 Contents 5 Ordernine Pats ANG SUD DCS ine a O E 235 Using genuine Lexmark parts ahd SUDPDHES anrasan Aiba e E A T 237 ONNE UPPI ES asa a a ARS eer RE ene 237 R placine parts ANG SUPPE Sennen a e aa a 237 Resetting the maintenance COUnNte ezeini E E E E NEE ENa 249 Moving the printe esdaunre iann a a a A teat ane onde 249 Managing TNE Printeren a a an L Finding advanced networking and administrator infOrmation ccccccssecsecceccscceseesseceeseeeeceeeceeeees 251 CHECKING the virtual di play ieas E O a aG 251 VIONNET C10 OE se E a E ct ei geeyesiaotsentans 251 Sete UR em aler ierat a a T T E E EER 251 Clearing Ja Sunaina a a an 2 OS Avoiding aM S erara a EEEE TE EA EAEE ae E TON 253 Understanding jam numbers and locationS seessessuseeessessesssrserrsreserssererrreessessesssreereserssersererereesseesee 254 20020 MAS IANS iea E a E 255 202 2053 DADS AIMS irna a a 260 DAK paperia n a aa a a a a a tas 266 2590 0a POr I e a a a N E a 267 ZO OC DAIL ANS n a a a a 267 TFOUBICSHOOUING ssssesiseicsssuesecioreseseseei sietas rae aa O SOIVING Dasic p
120. a stored on the printer hard disk Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity 63 Unformatted disk Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Format the printer hard disk If the error message remains the hard disk may be defective and require replacing 80 xx Fuser near life warning 1 Order a replacement fuser immediately 2 When print quality is reduced install the new fuser following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 80 xx Fuser life warning e Order a replacement fuser immediately When print quality is reduced install the new fuser following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 80 xx Replace fuser Replace the fuser using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 80 xx Fuser missing 1 Replace the fuser following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 82 xx Replace waste toner bottle 1 Replace the waste toner bottle For instructions on replacing the waste toner bottle from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Troubleshooting 283 82 xx Waste toner bottle missing Reinsert the waste toner bottle in
121. ad wiper out until it stops and then slowly slide it back into place 4 Clean the remaining three printhead lenses Paper curl Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings 2 Before sending the print job specify the correct paper type setting e For Windows users specify the paper type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the paper type from the Print dialog LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it 309 Troubleshooting 310 Print irregularities Try one or more of the following LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings 2 Before sending the print job specify the correct paper type setting e For Windows users specify the paper type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the paper type from the Print dialog AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES IMIAKE S
122. address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Security gt Set Date and Time 3 Click the Automatically Observe DST check box 4 Inthe Custom Time Zone Setup section set the DST start and end dates 5 Click Submit Faxing 117 Creating shortcuts Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to send a fax you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number A shortcut can be created to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Manage Shortcuts gt Fax Shortcut Setup Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password get one from your system support person 3 Type a unique name for the shortcut and then enter the fax number To create a multiple number shortcut enter the fax numbers for the group Note Separate each fax number in the group
123. aded order a new toner cartridge immediately A message on the printer display specifies what color cartridge is low in toner You can try to extend the life of the cartridges by pulling them out of the printer and shaking them to redistribute the toner Replacing the ADF parts Note The printer comes with a spare separator pad and air filter located under the scanner To access the spare parts remove the slotted screw Note It is recommended that the ADF area and parts be cleaned periodically Maintaining the printer 240 Replacing the pick roller assembly 1 Turn the printer off and then open the ADF cover 3 Dispose of the old pick roller assembly Maintaining the printer 241 Replacing the separator pad 1 With the ADF cover still open pull up on the separator pad to remove it 2 Replace the separator pad 3 Dispose of the old separator pad Maintaining the printer 242 Replacing the pick pad 1 With the ADF cover still open pull straight up on the pick pad to remove it 3 Open the flap to access the sensor lens underneath and then wipe the lens clean Maintaining the printer 243 Replacing the air filter 1 Locate the air filter on the back of the printer and then remove the cover Maintaining the printer 244 2 Remove the old air filter and then discard it 4 Turn the printer on Maintaining the printer 245 Replacing the waste toner bottle 1 Locat
124. ahl meiden KINAYNOX Ek uon adopatns aktivoBoAiac laser Kata tnv apaipeon twv KAGETWV kar THV ATIADHAALON THs LavdaAwonce Anodevyete tnv EKBEON otnv aktivo o ia laser VESZ LY Nem l that l zersugarzas fordulhat el a patronok elt vol t sakor s a zard szerkezet felbont sakor Ker lje a l zersugarnak val kitetts get PERICOLO Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco Evitare l esposizione al raggio laser FARE Usynlig laserstr ling n r kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill Unng eksponering for laserstr len NIEBEZPIECZE STWO niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady Nale y unika na wietlenia promieniem lasera ONACHO HesBugumoe nazepHoe n3nyyeHne Npr U3B e4eHHbIX KapTpng Kax n cHaTnn G6noknposkn N36era Te BO3MeNCTBUA Na3epHbIix Nyyen Pozor Nebezpe enstvo nevidite n ho laserov ho iarenia pri odobrat ch kazet ch a odblokovanej poistke Nevystavujte sa l om PELIGRO Se producen radiaciones l ser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado Evite la exposici n al haz de l ser FARA Osynlig laserstr lning n r patroner tas ur och sp rrmekanismen r upph vd Undvik exponering for laserstr len JER SRR RR ARRON EBL OCR E ARB ERODE F JER FBR AiR E BZ HELE Bi BR I RB AER GLAD R ERE SCR TE EER Fo fake A hVU yr VAMOS Aa y 7SBMICRO EL AARWL PHO SNE COU PHICS RO RWE
125. al Solutions Port 305 memory card 304 option does not work 303 paper tray problems 303 USB parallel interface card 305 printer problems solving basic 270 Index printer software installing 46 printhead lenses cleaning 232 printing black and white 85 canceling from printer control panel 92 directory list 89 font sample list 89 forms 84 from flash drive 86 from Macintosh 84 from Windows 84 Max Speed and Max Yield 85 menu settings page 58 network setup page 58 transparencies 90 printing a directory list 89 printing adocument 84 printing a font sample list 89 printing a menu settings page 58 printing a network setup page 58 printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer 88 from Windows 88 printing forms 84 printing from a flash drive 86 printing in black and white 85 publications where to find 9 Q Quality menu 205 Quiet Mode print quality troubleshooting 307 Quiet mode 218 R reattaching the system board cover 26 recycled paper using 79 217 recycling Lexmark packaging 222 Lexmark products 221 toner cartridges 222 WEEE statement 327 reducing a copy 97 reducing noise 218 Remote Operator Panel setting up 23 Remove packaging material area name 275 Remove paper from standard output bin 275 removing printer hard disk 41 repeat print jobs 88 printing from a Macintosh computer 88 printing from Windows 88 Replace separator pad 275 replacing toner cartridges 237 replacing supplie
126. al times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the cartridge Note If print quality does not improve then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT If the problem continues then the printer may need to be serviced Troubleshooting 313 Printer is printing blank pages Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PACKING MATERIAL LEFT ON THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE Remove the cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed Reinstall the cartridge MAKE SURE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER 1 Remove the cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the cartridge Note If print quality does not improve then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT If the problem continues then the printer may need to be serviced Repeating defects appear on prints S Try one or more of the following REPLACE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE Replace the cartridge of the color with the repeating defect if the defects occur in the following instances e Every 33 mm 1 30 in of the page e Every 35 3 mm 1 39 in of the page Troubleshooting 314 REPLACE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR Replace the photoc
127. ammed paper is located and then remove it a_ Ifthe jammed paper is visible under the fuser then firmly grasp the paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed b Ifthe jammed paper paper is visible at the top paper guide in the fuser assembly then firmly grasp the paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 258 c Ifthe jammed paper is not visible then remove the fuser unit Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the roller at the center of the fuser unit Doing so may damage the fuser 1 Turn the screws on the fuser counterclockwise to loosen them u A VY a 4 2 Using the handholds on each side lift and pull the fuser out of the printer A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The fuser might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching it Clearing jams 259 e Pull and then rotate the green rectangular knob clockwise to unlock the top paper guide g Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 260 i Pull and then rotate the green rectangular knob counterclockwise to firmly secure the top paper guide j Reinstall the fuser unit 1 Align the fuser unit using the handholds on each side and then place it back into the printer 4
128. ams that use different source assignments for trays drawers and feeders Notes e Off is the factory default setting e None ignores the Select Paper Feed command This selection appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5e interpreter e 0 199 allows a custom setting to be assigned Understanding the printer menus 214 Tray Renumber Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray drawer or feeder View Factory Defaults MPF Default 8 T1 Default 1 T2 Default 4 T3 Default 5 T4 Default 20 T5 Default 21 Env Default 6 MPaper Default 2 MeEnv Default 3 Tray Renumber Return all tray drawer and feeder assignments to the factory default settings Restore Defaults Yes No HTML menu Font Name Albertus MT Antique Olive Apple Chancery Arial MT Avant Garde Bodoni Bookman Chicago Clarendon Cooper Black Copperplate Coronet Courier Eurostile Garamond Geneva Gill Sans Goudy Helvetica Hoefler Text Intl CG Times Intl Courier Intl Univers Joanna MT Letter Gothic Lubalin Graph Marigold MonaLisa Recut Monaco New CenturySbk New York Optima Oxford Palatino StempelGaramond Taffy Times TimesNewRoman Univers Zapf Chancery NewSansMTCS NewSansMTCT New SansMTJA NewSansMTKO Set the default font for HTML documents Note The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not specify a font Understanding the printer menus Font Size 1 255 pt Scale
129. an enter the paper size of the original document Touch a paper size that matches the original document e Touch Mixed Sizes to copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width e Touch Auto Size Sense to allow the scanner to automatically determine the size of the original document Copy to This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed e Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded e Ifthe settings for Copy from and Copy to are different then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference e ifthe paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays then touch Manual Feeder and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder e When Copy to is set to Auto Size Match each copy matches the paper size of the original document If a matching paper size is not in one of the trays then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper ina tray or multipurpose feeder Copies This option allows you to set the number of copies to be printed Copying 102 Scale This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25 and 400 Scale can also be set for you automatically e When you want to copy from one size of paper to another such as from legal size to letter size paper setting the Copy from and
130. and then type a unique file name or use the default name Note Ifa JVM Out of Memory error occurs then repeat the export process until the configuration file is saved Importing a configuration from a file 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings or Configuration 3 Click Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF or click Embedded Solutions 4 From Installed Solutions click the name of the application you want to configure Setting up and using the home screen applications 24 5 Click Configure gt Import 6 Browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer and then load or preview it Note If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears then refresh the Web browser and then click Apply Additional printer setup 25 Additional printer setup Installing internal options A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Available internal options
131. anning takes too long or freezes the computer These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING Close all programs not being used THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH Select a lower scan resolution Poor scanned image quality These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages Troubleshooting 294 THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY Clean the scanner glass with a clean lint free cloth dampened with water For more information see Cleaning the scanner glass on page 229 ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Partial document or photo scans These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size settin
132. aper Size Type menu Note The standard 550 sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder do not automatically sense the paper size You must set the size from the Paper Size Type menu Large jobs do not collate These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following M Ake SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON From the Finishing menu or Print Properties set Collate to On Note Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the job Troubleshooting MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY Add printer memory or an optional hard disk Unexpected page breaks occur INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts 2 Touch the left or right arrow next to Print Timeout until the desired value appears 3 Touch Submit Solving copy problems Copier does not respond These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears Scanner unit does not close Make sure there are no obstructions 1 Lift the scanner unit 2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open
133. arranty service you may be required to present the feature or option with the product If you transfer this product to another user warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user Limited warranty service The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it or its original contents are substantially used up depleted or consumed To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location You are responsible for loss of or damage to a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part the item replaced becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark The replacement may be a new or repaired item The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced altered in need of a repair not included in warranty service damaged beyo
134. art number 14B5109 or 80D1877 to be installed on any line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland The Lexmark filter must be used as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse Cet appareil n cessite utilisation d un filtre de tonalit de facturation suisse n2 de r f rence Lexmark 14B5109 ou 80D1877 devant tre install sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse Ce filtre doit tre utilis pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes t l phoniques suisses Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz Fur dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zahlzeichenubertragung Lexmark Teilenummer 14B5109 oder 80D1877 fur jede Leitung installiert werden Uber die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte bertragen werden Die Verwendung des Lexmark Filters ist obligatorisch da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind Notices 334 Uso del prodotto in Svizzera Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero codice Lexmark 14B5109 o 80D1877 da installare su tutte le linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera necessario utilizzare il filtro Lexmark poich gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera Notice to Users in the European Union Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requireme
135. as directement limit mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas d passer cing Le num ro REN du modem est indiqu sur l tiquette produit situ e a l arri re de l quipement Les compagnies de t l phone constatent que les surtensions lectriques en particulier celles dues la foudre entra nent d importants d g ts sur les terminaux priv s connect s des sources d alimentation CA Il s agit la d un probleme majeur d chelle nationale En cons quence il vous est recommand de brancher un parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant a laquelle l quipement est connect Utilisez un parasurtenseur r pondant a des caract ristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifi par le laboratoire d assureurs UL Underwriter s Laboratories un autre laboratoire agr de type NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory ou un organisme de certification agr dans votre r gion ou pays Ceci pr vient tout endommagement de l quipement caus par les orages et autres surtensions lectriques Notices 333 Cet quipement utilise des prises de t l phone CA11A Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom
136. asset information including the printer serial number and model name The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned into an asset database Network Ports menu Active NIC menu Active NIC Notes Auto list of network cards e Auto is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when an optional network card is installed Standard Network or Network x menus Note Only active ports appear in this menu All inactive ports are omitted Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When Off is used the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When Off is used the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off Understanding the printer menus Use NPA Mode Off Auto Network Buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Job Buffering Mac Binar
137. assette for MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu item Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Understanding the printer menus 138 MP Feeder Type Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled e From the Paper menu Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu item Notes Custom Type x is the factory default setting Glossy Heavy Glossy Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Envelope Rough Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Custom Type x Manual Paper Size Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded A4 Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory A5 default setting A6 JIS B5 Letter Legal Executive Oficio M xico Folio Statement Universal Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Understanding the printer menus 139 Manual Paper Type Specify the type of paper being manually loaded Plain Paper Note Plain paper is the factory default setting Card Stock Transparency Recycled Glossy Heavy Glossy Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Roug Cotton Custom Type x Manual Envelope Size Specify the size of the envelope being manually loaded 7 3 4 Envelope Note 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting DL Envelope is the 9 Envelop
138. at risk for use with laser printers Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper also known as carbonless papers Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the paper Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser Preprinted papers that require a registration the precise location on the page greater than 2 3 mm 0 9 in such as optical character recognition OCR forms In some cases registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms Coated papers erasable bond synthetic papers thermal papers Rough edged rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers Recycled papers that fail EN12281 2002 European testing Paper weighing less than 60 g m 16 Ib Multiple part forms or documents For more information about Lexmark visit www lexmark com General sustainability related information can be found at the Environmental Sustainability link Storing paper Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality For best results store paper where the temperature is 21 C 70 F and the relative humidity is 40 Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24 C 65 to 75 F with relative humidity between 40 and 60 Store paper in cartons when possible on a pallet or shelf rather than on the floor Store individual packages on a flat surface Do not st
139. ault printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Parallel Buffer Set the size of the parallel input buffer Disabled Auto 3K to maximum size allowed Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any print jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer disable or reduce the size of the USB serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Job Buffering Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes Off is the factory default setting On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy process
140. ault setting for distinctive rings is On This allows the printer to answer single double and triple ring patterns a From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Settings gt Distinctive Rings b Select the pattern setting you want to change and then touch Submit Connecting to an adapter for your country or region The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the active telephone wall jack Country Region e Austria e New Zealand e Cyprus e Netherlands e Denmark e Norway e Finland e Portugal e France e Sweden e Germany e Switzerland e ireland e United Kingdom e Italy For some countries or regions a telephone line adapter is included in the box Use this adapter to connect an answering machine telephone or other telecommunications equipment to the printer 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter and then connect the adapter to the active telephone wall jack Note Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown It will fit the wall jack used in your location Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Faxing 116 If you do not know the IP address of the pri
141. avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding 2 Remove all paper from the printer 3 Dampen a clean lint free cloth with water Warning Potential Damage Do not use household cleaners or detergents as they may damage the finish of the printer 4 Wipe only the outside of the printer Warning Potential Damage Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer 5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before beginning a new print job Maintaining the printer 229 Cleaning the scanner glass Make sure you clean the ADF glass A small speck of dirt on the ADF glass can cause a streak that goes down the entire length of the scanned page 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the scanner cover White underside of the ADF cover White underside of the scanner cover ES Scanner glass ADF glass 3 Wipe the areas shown and let them dry 4 Close the scanner cover Cleaning the ADF parts Clean the ADF parts periodically to maintain optimal printing performance Residue on the ADF parts may cause print quality issues and false 290 294 paper jam messages 1 Turn the printer off 2 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth with water Maintaining the printer 230 3 Open the ADF cover
142. ax menu causes an error beep e Pressing dD from the home screen redials the most recent fax number Indicator light e Off The printer is off Blinking green The printer is warming up processing data or printing Solid green The printer is on but idle Blinking red Operator intervention is needed Start button Initiate the current job indicated on the display Start a copy job with the default settings el Note Pressing the button while scanning has no effect Stop button Stop all printer activity Note A list of options is displayed once Stopped appears on the display Home Return to the home screen button Note Pressing the Home button from the home screen resets all workflow factory defaults Back button e Delete the right most digit of the value in the Copy Count field The factory default value of 1 appears if the entire number is deleted by pressing numerous times e Delete the right most digit of a number entered manually in the Fax Destination List field You can also press to delete an entire shortcut entry When an entire line is deleted another press of causes the cursor to move up one line Delete the character to the left of the cursor in the E mail Destination List field If the character is in a shortcut then the shortcut is deleted 10 USB port Connect a flash drive to the printer Note Only the front USB port supports flash drives a a a a Understanding the home screen 16
143. ax profile e FIP E mail send Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can show only three jobs per screen If more than three jobs exist in a column then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs Change Language Launch the Change Language pop up window that lets you change the primary language of the printer Understanding the home screen 18 Features Feature Description Menu trail line A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen This feature shows the Sample Menus gt Settings gt Copy path taken to arrive at the current menu Settings gt Number of Copies Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen If you touch an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies is set and saved then the selection is not saved and it does not become the default setting Attendance message alert If an attendance message affects a function then this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks Warning If an error condition occurs then this icon appears A Printer IP address The IP address of your network printer is located at the top left corner of the home Sample 123 123 123 123 screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods You can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and remotely configure printer settings
144. ay have changed The destination network address can be accessed from the Embedded Web Server MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS CONNECTED TO THE NETWORK Make sure that all appropriate network cables are securely connected and that the network settings of the printer are correctly configured For information on networking the printer see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD that came with the printer IF THE SOURCE FILE AND PRINTER RESIDE IN DIFFERENT DOMAINS THEN MAKE SURE THE DOMAIN INFORMATION IS SPECIFIED If the source file exists within a different domain than the printer then you can edit the destination from the application configuration page and enter the appropriate domain information in the Network Address and Network Domain fields If you do not know the network address of the computer where your source file resides then consult your system support person You can also add the domain name to the Domain Search Order list under the printer network setup CHECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS 1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer then you can e View the information on the printer control panel home screen or in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings or Configuration 3 Click D
145. bels a month e Vinyl pharmacy and dual sided labels are not supported For detailed information on label printing characteristics and design see the Card Stock amp Label Guide available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com When printing on labels e Use labels designed specifically for laser LED printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that The labels can withstand temperatures up to 210 C 410 F without sealing excessive curling wrinkling or releasing hazardous emissions Note Labels can be printed at a higher fusing temperature up to 220 C 428 F if Label Weight is set to Heavy Select this setting using the Embedded Web Server or from the printer control panel Paper menu Label adhesives face sheet printable stock and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi 172 kPa pressure without delaminating oozing around the edges or releasing hazardous fumes e Do not use labels with slick backing material e Use full label sheets Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing resulting in a jam Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive and could void the printer and cartridge warranties Do not use labels with exposed adhesive Do not print within 1 mm 0 04 in of the edge of the label of the perforations or between die cuts of the label Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge Zone coating of the adhesive
146. bleshooting black streaks on a page 316 blank pages 313 characters have jagged edges 307 clipped images 307 fine horizontal lines 307 gray background 308 light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints 309 poor transparency quality 320 print irregularities 310 print is too dark 311 print is too light 311 repeating defects 313 shadow images appear on prints 314 skewed print 315 solid color pages 316 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 317 streaked vertical lines on prints 318 toner fog or background shading on the page 318 toner rubs off 319 toner specks 320 white streaks on a page 316 print troubleshooting error reading flash drive 286 held jobs do not print 287 incorrect characters print 289 incorrect margins 308 jammed pages are not reprinted 306 job prints from wrong tray 289 job prints on wrong paper 289 jobs do not print 286 Large jobs do not collate 289 multiple language PDF files do not print 286 paper curl 309 paper frequently jams 306 print job takes longer than expected 288 printing slows down 288 tray linking does not work 289 345 unexpected page breaks occur 290 printer basic model 11 fully configured 11 minimum clearances 10 moving 10 249 250 selecting a location 10 shipping 250 printer configurations 11 printer control panel 14 factory defaults restoring 221 printer hard disk disposing of 223 encrypting 225 installing
147. ce in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Note To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations Modular component notice Wireless equipped models contain the following modular component s Lexmark regulatory type model LEX M01 003 FCC ID IYLM01003 IC 2376A M01003 Notices 327 Noise emission levels The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296 Note Some modes may not apply to your product 1 meter average sound pressure dBA Printing 53 dBA Scanning 54 dBA Copying 54 dBA Ready 35 dBA Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE directive g The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European Union We
148. ce to users in Brazil Este equipamento opera em carater secundario isto e nao tem direito a protecao contra interferencia prejudicial mesmo de estacoes do mesmo tipo e nao pode causar interferencia a sistemas operando em carater primario Res ANATEL 282 2001 Industry Canada Canada This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Notices 335 This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada To prevent radio interference to the licensed service this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding Equipment or its transmit antenna that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population consult Safety Code 6 obtainable from Health Canada s Web site www hc sc gc ca rpb The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met Industry Canada Canada Cet appareil est conforme la norme R
149. ces stored in a flash memory or on the printer hard disk From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Print Directory Printing on specialty media Tips on using letterhead e Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers e Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities Printing 90 Before loading letterhead flex the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead For information on how to load letterhead see Loading the standard or optional 550 sheet tray on page 59 Loading the multipurpose feeder on page 71 Tips on using transparencies Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities When printing on transparencies Feed transparencies from any tray or drawer except the optional 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure transparencies are able to withstand temperatures up to 170 C 338 F without melting discoloring offsetting or releasing hazardous emissions To prevent print quality problems avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies Before loading transparencies flex the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together We recommend Lexmark part number 12A8240 for letter size transparencies and Lexmark part number 12
150. ck if all tray configurations are correct Remove unnecessary trays if needed Troubleshooting 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Too many disks installed 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the excess disks 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Too many flash options installed 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the excess flash memory 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Too many trays attached 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the additional trays 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 59 Incompatible tray x Try one or more of the following e Remove the specified tray e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray 61 Remove defective disk Try one or more of the following Remove the defective printer hard disk e Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk 281 Troubleshooting 282 62 Disk full Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing e Delete fonts macros and other dat
151. commended paper or specialty media e Do not load wrinkled creased damp bent or curled paper e Flex and straighten paper before loading it e Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand e Do not mix paper sizes weights or types in the same stack Clearing jams 254 e Make sure all paper sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus e Store paper per manufacturer recommendations Understanding jam numbers and locations When a jam occurs a message indicating the jam location appears on the printer display Open doors and covers and remove trays to access jam locations To resolve any paper jam message you must clear all jammed papers from the paper path Area name Jam numbers What to do Inside the printer 200 201 Open the front door and then remove the jammed paper from behind the toner cartridge area Open the front door and then remove the jammed paper from under the photoconductor units Open the front door and then remove the jammed paper from under the fuser Inside the printer Open the front door and then remove the jammed paper from fuser area Open the top access cover and then remove the jammed paper Inside the printer Open the front door and then remove the jammed paper located between the front door and Tray 1 Standard output bin Remove all paper from the standard output bin and then remove the jammed paper Tray x 244
152. creen make sure no scaling is being selected Troubleshooting 292 When the text is light or disappearing e From the Copy screen navigate to Content gt Text gt ZS gt select the appropriate source for the original document being copied gt ZS From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Sharpness gt increase the current setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Background removal and then reduce the current setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Contrast gt increase the current setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Shadow detail gt reduce the current setting When the output appears washed out or overexposed On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being scanned From the Copy screen adjust the Darkness setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Shadow detail gt reduce the current setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Background removal gt reduce the current setting Partial document or photo copies These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left
153. ctural drawings maps electrical circuit diagrams and flow charts Notes e Off is the factory default setting e To set Enhance Fine Lines from the software program with a document open click File gt Print and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup e To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server open a Web browser and then type the IP address of the printer in the address field Reduce the amount of toner used for graphics and images The amount of toner used for text is not reduced Notes e Off is the factory default setting On overrides Toner Darkness settings Adjust brightness in color outputs Notes e Ois the factory default setting e This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used Adjust contrast in color outputs Notes e Ois the factory default setting e This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used Adjust saturation in color outputs Notes e Ois the factory default setting e This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used Understanding the printer menus Use Color Balance Cyan 5to5 Magenta 5to5 Yellow 5to5 Black 5to5 Reset Defaults Color Samples sRGB Display sRGB Vivid Display True Black Vivid Off RGB US CMYK Euro CMYK Vivid CMYK Off CMYK Manual Color RGB Image Vivid SRGB Display Display True Black SRGB Vivid Off RGB Text V
154. d the stored jobs print Notes e Off isthe factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a non read only printer hard disk is installed This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power Set the logical and physical printable area Notes e Normal is the factory default setting When attempting to print data in the non printable area defined by the Normal setting the printer clips the image at the boundary Whole Page allows images to be moved into the non printable area defined by the Normal setting but the printer clips the image at the Normal setting boundary This setting affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter This setting has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter Set the printer for a faster print speed or a higher toner yield Note Max Yield is the factory default setting Set the printer to print text and graphics using only the black toner cartridge Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 203 Download Target Set the storage location for downloads RAM Flash Disk Notes e RAM is the factory default setting Downloads stored in RAM are temporary Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage Downloads remain in flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off This menu item appears only wh
155. d Sizes A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Custom Scan Size x Business Card 3x5in 4x6in Use Multi Page TIFF Provide a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to fax job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes e On is the factory default setting e This menu item applies to all scan functions Enable Analog Receive Enable analog fax receive Note Off is the factory default setting On E mail Settings menu E mail Server Setup Specify e mail server information Subject Message Notes e The subject box has a limitation of 255 characters Base file name e The message box has a limitation of 512 characters Understanding the printer menus Use E mail Server Setup Send me a copy Never appears On by default Off by default Always On E mail Server Setup Max E mail size 0 65535 KB E mail Server Setup Size error message E mail Server Setup Limit destinations E mail Server Setup Web Link Setup Server Login Password Path Base file name Web Link Format PDF pdf Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version 1 2 1 6 A la Content Type Text Photo Photo Text Graphics 189 ss Send a copy of the e mail to the sender Note Never appears is the factory default setting Specify the maximum e mail size in kilob
156. d Temperature settings before scanning a document e Custom Job Use to combine multiple scan jobs into a single scan job e Edge Erase Use to remove smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scanned image e Transmission Log Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log Understanding the printer menus Understanding the printer menus Menus list Supplies Replace Supply Cyan Cartridge Magenta Cartridge Yellow Cartridge Black Cartridge Cyan Photoconductor Unit Magenta Photoconductor Unit Yellow Photoconductor Unit Black Photoconductor Unit Separator Pick Assembly and Roller Waste Toner Bottle Fuser Transfer Module Security Edit Security Setups Miscellaneous Security Settings Confidential Print Disk Wiping Security Audit Log Set Date and Time Option Card Menu Paper Menu Default Source Paper Size Type Configure MP Substitute Size Paper Texture Paper Loading Custom Types Custom Names Custom Scan Sizes Universal Setup Bin Setup Network Ports Active NIC Network Standard USB Parallel x Serial x SMTP Setup A list of installed DLEs Download Emulators appears Reports Menu Settings Page Device Statistics Network Setup Page Network x Set
157. d the domain name to the Domain Search Order list under the printer network setup MAKE SURE THE FIREWALL SOFTWARE IS ALLOWING COMMUNICATION If the destination resides on a computer that uses a newer version of the Windows operating system Windows XP or later and the Windows Firewall is enabled then the printer may have difficulty sending information to the destination if the destination and the printer reside on different subnets The Windows Firewall must either be configured to allow communication with the subnet the printer resides on or the destination should be set up on the same subnet as the printer For more information contact your system support person MAKE SURE A FILE WITH THE DEFAULT FILE NAME DOES NOT ALREADY EXIST IN THE DESTINATION If the three configuration settings for the File Name section of the application configuration page are not selected allow user to enter file name append time stamp overwrite existing file and a file using the default file name already exists within the destination then there will be no method in place to distinguish the newly scanned file from the file present in the destination The printer will not be able to overwrite the old file the new file will not receive a time stamp to differentiate it from the old file and the user will not be able to give the new file a different name In this case the old file must either be removed from the destination or one of the previously mentioned settings
158. d unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each paper drawer or tray separately Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Learning about the printer 9 Learning about the printer Finding information about the printer What are you looking for Find it here Initial setup instructions Setup documentation The setup documentation came with the printer and is also available on the Lexmark Web e Connecting the printer site at http support lexmark com e Installing the printer software Additional setup and instructions for using the printer User s Guide The User s Guide is available on the Selecting and storing paper and specialty media Software and Documentation CD For updates check our Web site at Loading paper http support lexmark com Configuring printer settings Viewing and printing documents and photos Setting up and using the printer software Configuring the printer on a network depending on your printer model Caring for and maintaining the printer Troubleshooting and solving problems Instructions for Networking Guide Open the Software and Documentation CD and then look for Printer and Software Documentation under the Pubs folder F
159. d user data Types of memory Description Volatile memory Your printer uses standard Random Access Memory RAM to temporarily buffer user data during simple print and copy jobs Non volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non volatile memory EEPROM and NAND flash memory Both types are used to store the operating system device settings network information scanner and bookmark settings and embedded solutions Securing the printer 224 Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed The printer hard disk is designed for device specific functionality This lets the device retain buffered user data from complex scan print copy and fax jobs as well as form data and font data Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances e The printer is being decommissioned e The printer hard disk is being replaced e The printer is being moved to a different department or location e The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization The printer is being removed from your premises for service The printer is being sold to another organization Disposing of a printer hard disk Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer or its hard disk
160. danandeassusneestnieisearesasubenneeateseonnseaieahs 59 Conng rnng Universal paper SOU GING S senescence ineca a er rE e dient r a AET aerea 59 Loading the standard or optional 550 sheet tray sseesssesesresrrrrrsresresrsrrserrrrresrrsresrrserresrrsresersessesere 59 Contents 3 Loading the optional 550 sheet special media tray ccccceccseecscceeceuceeeccenceeseesseeeeeeeceeseeseeeeeeeesegess 63 Loading the 2 000 sheet high capacity FECCES ccccceccesccsseceeeceeceeeeseseccsceeeceteeeceeeeenseeeeeeeseeeseeseneess 69 LOGINS the MiUITID UD OS COCO Cioabi gaits AET T T A 71 ERIKS ana UMMA IS aysina naea ee E a a a a E 74 Paper and specialty media puide liNe Sarnano 7 Paper CUIG CIOS naniiacaen nie A a E Aa 77 Supported paper sizes types and WEISHTHS cccccecceeecceeccesecececeeseusseeececueceseeeceeeeeseeneeeeeseneeeeeeesegees 81 PAAUNE TONS rnea a E N N N AA 84 PUB CIS a CO CUIIINC aa O EA A N 84 PRIMES Oma Nas MAN Oseira a a Gasaiaea aneae ead an oupdateens 86 Printing confidential and other held jODS cccccsseccsseccesceesececesceeuececseceeeececseceeeceenecseaeesseeeensceeseaeees 88 Printinge IMPORMALOM DAC EScenge a r ee lamuak deaeaet aesaumst tannins aameseseeshe 89 Prim CIN Oh iSDEClalL Medida a Ea eas aa eee eee 89 CASING aE PINO Dnon E tansadeatusaus anus aumtadiendtussSurraneeapneretausqanee Snare tare 92 CODV ING so cccichcbecucnntensatnaiauseuenbiocceudunsreelescabercaesaunnissisaun
161. dapter For more information and to request an R interface port contact your ISDN provider e If you are using DSL then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use For more information contact your DSL provider e fyou are using a PBX telephone service then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX If none exists consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE e Place atest call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly e If the telephone line is being used by another device then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax e If you are using the On Hook Dial feature then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT To ensure the printer is working correctly connect it directly to the telephone line Disconnect any answering machines computers with modems or telephone line splitters CHECK FOR JAMS Clear any jams and then make sure that Ready appears TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax Call your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting Voice MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions To
162. dard tray is the factory default setting e From the Paper menu Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting Specify the paper size loaded in each tray Notes e The factory default setting depends on the value of Paper Sizes in the General Settings menu e For trays with automatic paper size sensing only the size detected by the tray appears Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Understanding the printer menus Tray x Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Glossy Heavy Glossy Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Custom Type x MP Feeder Size A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Letter Legal Executive Oficio M xico Folio Statement Universal 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope 137 Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray Notes e Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1 Custom Type x is the factory default setting for all other trays e favailable a user defined name will appear instead of Custom Type x e Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder Notes e Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting e From the Paper menu Configure MP Feeder must be set to C
163. ded by a router Note On is the factory default setting Set the host name Note These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Enable DHCPv 6 in the printer Note On is the factory default setting Wireless menu Note This menu is available only in printer models connected to a wireless network To access the menu navigate to any of the following e Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt Wireless e Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Establish a wireless network and enable network security Start Push Button Method Start PIN Method Notes e Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless network by pressing buttons on both the printer and the access point wireless router within a given period of time Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network by using a PIN on the printer and entering it into the wireless settings of the access point Enable Disable WPS Auto detection Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with Enable WPS uses Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method Disable Note Disable is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 151 Network Mode Specify the network mode Infrastructure Ad hoc Notes e Ad hoc is the factory default setting This configures wireless connection directly between the printer
164. derstanding the printer menus 187 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission To access the menu from the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt Fax Settings gt Fax Server Setup Fax Server Setup Use AK To Format Specify the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer control panel Subject Specify the SMTP server port information Image Format Specify the image type for scan to fax jobs PDF pdf XPS xps TIFF tif Content Type Specify the content of the original document Text Note Text is the factory default setting Text Photo Graphics Photo Content Source Specify how the original document was produced Color Laser Note Color Laser is the factory default setting Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Fax Resolution Specify the resolution level for scan to fax Standard Fine 200 dpi Super Fine 300 dpi Ultra Fine 600 dpi Darkness Lighten or darken the output 1 9 Note 5 factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 188 Use To Orientation Specify the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Landscape Original Size Specify the paper size of the document that is being scanned Letter Note Mixed Sizes is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory Legal default setting Executive Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixe
165. dial an outside line first Touch Fax It Sending a fax using the computer The printer driver fax option allows you to print to fax where the printer will send a queued document as a fax rather than print it The fax option functions as a normal fax machine but is controlled through the printer driver instead of the printer control panel 1 2 7 With a document open click File gt Print Select the printer and then navigate to Properties gt Fax tab gt Enable fax Enter the recipient fax number s in the Fax number s field Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature If necessary enter a prefix in the Dialing prefix field Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation If you want to include a cover page with the fax then select Include cover page with fax and enter the appropriate information Click OK Notes e The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver For information on installing these drivers see the Software and Documentation CD e The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under Configuration tab before it can be used e If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected then you will be prompted to verify the recipient information before the fax is sent If this check box is not selected then the queued document will be sent automatically as a
166. ditional 3 Under Publications on this CD select Networking Guide USB parallel interface card does not operate correctly CuHeck THE USB PARALLEL INTERFACE CARD CONNECTION Make sure the USB parallel interface card is securely connected to the printer system board CHECK THE CABLE Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected Troubleshooting 306 Solving paper feed problems Paper frequently jams Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER Use recommended paper and specialty media For more information see the chapter about paper and specialty media guidelines MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY Make sure the paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located in the tray or feeder MAKE SURE THE ENTIRE PAPER STACK IS SITTING FLAT IN THE TRAY Before loading the paper do the following e Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared CHECK THE PAPER PATH The paper path is not clear Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path and then touch Continue Jammed pages ar
167. double click the printer name Note The application referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10 2 is now called Bonjour by Apple Inc 6 From the Embedded Web Server navigate to where the wireless settings information are stored Configure the printer for wireless access 1 Type the network name SSID in the appropriate field 2 Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode setting if you are using an access point wireless router 3 Select the type of security you want to use to protect the wireless network 4 Enter the security information necessary for the printer to connect to the wireless network 5 Click Submit 6 Open the AirPort application on the computer In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Network gt AirPort In Mac OS X version 10 4 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Internet Connect gt AirPort 7 From the Network pop up menu select the name of the wireless network Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly To print on a network printer each Macintosh user must install a custom printer driver file and create a print queue in the Printer Setup Utility or Print Center 1 Install a printer driver file on the computer a_ Insert the Software and Documentation CD and then double click the installer package for the printer b Follow the instructions on the computer screen Additional printer setup f Select a destination and
168. downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Note This menu item appears only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed 161 Understanding the printer menus Wiping Mode Off Auto Manual Scheduled Wiping Time Day Manual Wiping Start now Do not start now Automatic Method Single pass Multiple pass Manual Method Single pass Multiple pass Scheduled Method Single pass Multiple pass 162 a Specify the mode for disk wiping Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer determines when to initiate a disk wipe Set the schedule for disk wiping Notes Time is used to set the time for scheduled wiping Day is used to set the specific day or period for scheduled wiping Select from the following options Sunday to Friday Everyday Weekdays and Weekends Scheduled wipes are initiated without displaying a user warning or confirmation message Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without first having to wipe it Overwrite the disk space that has been used to hold data from a processed print job This type of wiping does not erase any information related to an unprocessed print job Notes e Do not start now is the factory default setting e If the Disk Wiping access control is activated then a user must successfully authenticate and have the required authorization in order to initiate the disk wipe Mark the disk space
169. e If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent then the fax is sent the next time the printer is turned on This setting can be especially useful in sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain hours or when transmission times are cheaper Advanced Options Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings e Advanced Imaging Use to adjust the Background Removal Contrast Color Balance Negative Image Mirror Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you fax the document Custom Job Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job e Edge Erase Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan e Transmission Log Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log Holding and forwarding faxes Holding faxes This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four se
170. e 90 seconds is the factory default setting e A setting value of O disables the timeout e If a value of 1 9 is selected then the setting is saved as 10 Banner Page Allow the printer to print a banner page Note Off is the factory default setting On TCP IP menu Note This menu is available only in network models or printers attached to print servers To access the menu navigate to any of the following e Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt TCP IP e Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt TCP IP Activate Activate or deactivate TCP IP Note On is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 149 Use To Set Hostname Set the current TCP IP host name Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server IP Address View or change the current TCP IP address Note Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP Netmask View or change the current TCP IP netmask View or change the current TCP IP gateway Enable DHCP Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting Note On is the factory default setting Specify the RARP address assignment setting Note On is the factory default setting Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting Note On is the factory default setting Enable
171. e ADF replacement parts only post a replace message when they reach their expected life Ordering a toner cartridge When a message appears on the printer display indicating which toner cartridge needs to be replaced immediately order a new toner cartridge For information on replacing a toner cartridge see the instruction sheet that came with the supply Estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO IEC 19798 standard with about 5 coverage per color Extremely low print coverage less than 1 25 for a color for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield for that color and may cause cartridge parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner Recommended toner cartridges and part numbers Black High Yield Toner Cartridge X746H1KG X746H2KG Yellow Toner Cartridge X746A1YG X746A2YG Yellow High Yield Toner Cartridge X748H1YG X748H2YG Magenta Toner Cartridge X746A1MG X746A2MG Magenta High Yield Toner Cartridge X748H1MG X748H2MG Cyan Toner Cartridge X746A1CG X746A2CG Cyan High Yield Toner Cartridge X748H1CG X748H2CG These toner cartridges are supported only in X748x printer models Ordering a fuser or a transfer module A message on the printer display appears when the fuser or transfer module needs to be replaced For information on replacing the fuser or transfer module see the instruction sheet that came with the supply Maintaining the printer 236 Recommended part numbers Part name Part number
172. e Description Confidential Lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel Note The PIN is set from the computer It must be four digits using the numbers 0 9 Verify Lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining copies It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed Reserve Lets you store print jobs for printing at a later time The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu Repeat Lets you print and store print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting Notes e You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs e Confidential Verify Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs 2 Touch Submit Printing confidential and other held jobs Note Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you delete them For Windows users 1 With a document open click File gt Print 2 Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup 3 Click Print and Hold 4 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat R
173. e This menu applies to all scan functions Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 50 is the factory default setting Specify how the images will be sent Note Attachment is the factory default setting Provide a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to e mail job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes e On is the factory default setting e This menu applies to all scan functions Specify whether or not the transmission log prints Note Print log is the factory default setting Specify the paper source for printing e mail logs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Enable the Text Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Custom Job scanning On Scan Preview On Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Background Removal 4 to 4 Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Color Dropout Co
174. e USB port on the front of the printer The USB Drive home screen appears 4 Select the destination folder and then touch Scan to USB drive 5 Adjust the scan settings 6 Touch Scan It Using the ScanBack Utility You can use the Lexmark ScanBack Utility instead of the Embedded Web Server to create scan to PC profiles The ScanBack Utility can be downloaded from the Lexmark Web site home page on http support lexmark com 1 Set up your scan to PC profile a Launch the ScanBack Utility b Select the printer If no printers are listed then contact your system support person or click Setup to manually search for an IP address or host name c Follow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and what kind of output you want to create Scanning 131 d Select any of the following e Show MFP Instructions View or print the instructions e Create Shortcut Save this group of settings to use again e Click Finish A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images 2 Scan your original documents a Load all pages in the ADF or on the scanner glass b From the printer control panel navigate to Scan Email gt Profiles gt select your scan profile gt Submit Note Your output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified Using the scan profile options Original Size This option sets the size of the documents
175. e file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG e JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs e XPS Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer E mailing 110 Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation and Binding e Sides Duplex Specifies if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e mail e Orientation Specifies the orientation of the original document and then changes Sides and Binding to match the orientation e Binding Specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Scan Preview This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e mail When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Advanced Options Touching this button opens a screen where you can change the following settings e Advanced Imaging Use to adjust the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you e mail the document e Custom Job Use to combine
176. e flash drive into the USB port of the printer All your personal preferences are automatically uploaded including job settings home screen preferences and address book Note The icon appears only when a flash drive with My MFP settings is inserted into the USB port of the printer To set up My MFP insert a flash drive into the USB port of the printer and then follow the instructions on the printer display to run the setup wizard To use My MFP insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer when you want to copy fax or scan Understanding WS Scan Icon Description The Web Services Scan application lets you scan documents at the network printer and then send the scanned image to your computer WS Scan is a Microsoft application that is similar to Scan to Network but has the capability of sending the scanned image to a Windows based application To learn more about WS Scan see the Microsoft documentation Note The icon appears on the printer home screen only when there is a computer registered with the network printer The computer must have either Windows 7 or Windows Vista operating system installed Setting up and using the home screen applications 23 Setting up Remote Operator Panel This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near the network printer From your computer screen you can vie
177. e international factory default setting 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope Manual Envelope Type Specify the type of envelope being manually loaded Envelope Note Envelope is the factory default setting Rough Envelope Custom Type x Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Configure MP menu Configure MP Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder Cassette Notes Manual First e Cassette is the factory default setting Cassette configures the multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source e Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual feed print jobs e First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source Understanding the printer menus Substitute Size menu Substitute Size Off Statement A5 Letter A4 All Listed Paper Weight menu Plain Weight Light Normal Heavy Card Stock Weight Light Normal Heavy Transparency Weight Light Normal Heavy Recycled Weight Light Normal Heavy Glossy Weight Light Normal Heavy Heavy Glossy Weight Light Normal Heavy Labels Weight Light Normal Heavy 140 Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available Notes e All Listed is the factory default setting All available substitutions are allowed e Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed e Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without C
178. e not reprinted TURN ON JAM RECOVERY 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Print Recovery 2 Touch the arrows next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears 3 Touch Submit Troubleshooting 307 Solving print quality problems If these suggestions do not correct the problem then contact customer support You may have a printer part that requires adjustment or replacement Characters have jagged or uneven edges If you are using downloaded fonts verify that the fonts are supported by the printer the host computer and the software program Clipped images Try one or more of the following CHECK THE GUIDES Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Size setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting e For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Fine horizontal lines appear on color pages You may notice fine horizontal lines in photographs or pages with a high concentration of color This can occur when the printer is in Quiet Mode To fix this set Quiet Mode to Off Image Photo Troubleshooting Gray background CHECK THE TONER D
179. e paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient gt type an e mail address gt Send as 4 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send e PDF Use this to create a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com e Secure PDF Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access e TIFF Use this to create multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG E mailing 108 e JPEG Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs e XPS Use this to create a single XML Paper Specification XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer 5 Touch E mail It Note If you selected Secure PDF you will be prompted to enter your password twice Canceling an e mail e When using the ADF touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears e When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page Finish the Job appears Understanding e mail options Recipients This option lets you enter the d
180. e printer first Warning Potential Damage Never use envelopes with stamps clasps snaps windows coated linings or self stick adhesives These envelopes may severely damage the printer 5 From the printer control panel verify the paper size and paper type setting for the feeder based on the paper you loaded Linking and unlinking trays When the paper size and paper type for any trays are the same the printer will link those trays When one linked tray becomes empty paper will feed from the next linked tray It is recommended to give all unique paper such as letterhead and different colored plain papers a different custom type name so that the trays they are in will not automatically link Unlinking trays 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu 3 Change the paper size and type settings of the tray so that they do not match the settings of any other tray and then click Submit Warning Potential Damage Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type Printing issues may occur i
181. e the waste toner bottle release button on the left side of the printer 2 Press the release button to the left and then pull the waste toner bottle out to remove it from the printer eC a R Ont pitti 4 Peel the seal from the side of the full waste toner bottle and then place it over the hole to seal off the waste toner bottle 5 Place the sealed waste toner bottle in the recycling bag Maintaining the printer 246 6 Place the bag into the shipping box used for the replacement part Replacing a photoconductor 1 Open the top access cover and then open the front door Maintaining the printer 247 Warning Potential Damage To avoid overexposing the photoconductors do not leave the front door open for more than 10 minutes 2 Pull the specified photoconductor up and then slide it to the right to remove it from the printer Maintaining the printer 248 4 Align and insert the left end of the photoconductor and then press the right end into place Maintaining the printer 249 Resetting the maintenance counter Reset the maintenance counter after installing the new photoconductors Use any one of the following procedures When a replace or low message does not appear Follow this procedure when the photoconductors are replaced and no replace or low message appears 1 From the home screen navigate to
182. e to Continue gt Letterhead gt Continue gt Copy It Customizing copy settings Copying in black and white 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Allow color copies gt Off gt 7S gt Submit Copying to a different size 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 Touch Copy from gt select the size of the original document gt S 5 Touch Copy to gt select the size of the copy gt A Note The printer will scale the size automatically 6 Touch Copy It Making copies using paper from a selected tray 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into t
183. e touching it 2 Open the front door Warning Potential Damage To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units do not leave the front door open for more than 10 minutes 3 If lodged under the photoconductor units then firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 f the jammed paper is lodged too tightly under the photoconductor units then remove the photoconductor units and place them on a flat surface Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs Clearing jams 257 C e 5 TEN F M lt a HNK Dy a A q Lg 5 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 6 Reinstall each photoconductor unit 7 Close the front door and then close the printer top access cover 8 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Paper jam in the fuser area 1 Open the printer top access cover A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching it 2 Open the front door Warning Potential Damage To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units do not leave the front door open for more than 10 minutes 3 Determine where the j
184. ed An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device including fax machines to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine South Africa telecommunications notice This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device when connected to the PSTN Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is an indication of the maximum number of
185. ee Connecting to a DSL service on page 113 Connect to a Private Branch eXchange PBX or Integrated See Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system on page 114 Services Digital Network ISDN system Use a Distinctive Ring service See Connecting to a distinctive ring service on page 114 Connect through an adapter used in your area See Connecting to an adapter for your country or region on page 115 Connecting to an analog telephone line If your telecommunications equipment uses a US style RJ11 telephone line then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack A N S W L N C s BA Connecting to a DSL service If you subscribe to a DSL service then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord and then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter Note Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration Faxing 114 3 Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or term
186. eed box click one of the following 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 4 Click Submit Solving home screen applications problems An application error has occurred CHECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS 1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser Troubleshooting 299 If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer then you can e View the information on the printer control panel home screen or in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or menu settings page and then locate the information in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings or Configuration 3 Click Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF or click Embedded Solutions 4 Click System tab gt Log 5 From the Filter menu select an application status 6 From the Application menu select an application and then click Submit MAKE SURE THE FILE NAME YOU WANT TO SCAN TO IS NOT ALREADY IN USE Verify that the file to which you want to scan is not open by another application or user To help prevent errors make sure either Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file is selected in the destination configuration settings ADJUST THE SCAN SETTINGS In the destination configuration settings lower the scan settings For example to lower the scan resolution disable Color or change the Content type setting to Text CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT If you still cannot isolate the proble
187. eeder ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents Using the ADF The Automatic Document Feeder ADF can scan multiple pages including duplex pages When using the ADF Load the document into the ADF faceup short edge first Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray Scan sizes from 148 x 210 mm 5 8 x 8 3 in to 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in Scan documents with mixed page sizes letter and legal Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g m 14 to 32 Ib Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass Using the scanner glass The scanner glass can be used to scan or copy single pages or book pages When using the scanner glass Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Scan or copy documents up to 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in Copy books up to 25 4 mm 1 in thick Learning about the printer 14 Using the printer control panel NES a 10 9 Use the To a Display View printing e mailing copying and faxing options as well as status and error messages Sleep button Enable Sleep Mode or
188. eived fax has poor print quality 298 faxing blocking junk faxes 120 canceling a fax job 121 changing resolution 119 choosing a fax connection 112 configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time 116 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 117 creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 117 distinctive ring service 114 fax setup 112 forwarding faxes 124 making a fax lighter or darker 120 sending a fax 118 sending a fax at a scheduled time 120 sending using the printer control panel 117 setting the date and time 116 Index setting the fax number or station number 115 setting the outgoing fax name or Station name 115 viewing a fax log 120 FCC notices 326 331 334 fiber optic network setup 52 finding more information about the printer 9 Finishing menu 204 firmware card installing 32 flash drive printing from 86 Flash Drive menu 197 flash drives supported file types 87 flash memory card installing 32 troubleshooting 304 font sample list printing 89 Forms and Favorites setting up 21 forwarding faxes 124 FTP scanning using address book 127 FTP address creating shortcuts using the touch screen 126 FTP screen advanced options 129 options 127 128 FTP Settings menu 193 fuser ordering 235 G General Settings menu 166 green settings Eco Mode 218 Hibernate Mode 220 Quiet Mode 218 H held jobs 88 printing from a Macintosh computer 88 printing from Windows 88 Help menu 216 Hibernate M
189. el x 153 PCL Emul 212 PDF 211 PostScript 211 Quality 205 Reports 145 148 Security Audit Log 163 Serial x 155 Set Date Time 165 Setup 202 SMTP Setup menu 158 Standard Network 146 Standard USB 152 Substitute Size 140 Supplies 134 TCP IP 148 Universal Setup 144 Utilities 210 Wireless 150 XPS 211 menus diagram 133 Miscellaneous menu 160 moving the printer 10 249 250 multipurpose feeder loading 71 My MFP setting up 22 troubleshooting forgot password 302 N Network x menu 146 Network Card menu 148 network options 25 network setup page printing 58 Networking Guide where to find 251 No analog phone line connected to modem fax is disabled 275 noise emission levels 327 non volatile memory 223 erasing 224 notices 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 O optional 550 sheet special media tray loading 63 optional special media tray loading 63 344 optional tray loading 59 options 2000 sheet drawer 43 550 sheet drawer 43 550 sheet specialty media drawer 43 firmware card 32 firmware cards 25 flash memory card 32 Internal Solutions Port 33 list 25 memory card 30 memory cards 25 network 25 order of installation 42 ports 25 printer hard disk installing 37 printer hard disk removing 41 updating in printer driver 47 options touch screen copy 101 102 103 128 e mail 108 109 110 fax 121 122 123 FTP 127 128 scan 131 scan to computer 131 132 ordering fuser 235 photoc
190. eling a print job from a computer 92 from the printer control panel 92 canceling an e mail 108 cannot open Embedded Web Server 323 card stock tips 91 Change paper source to custom string 271 Change paper source to custom type name 270 Change paper source to paper type paper size 271 checking an unresponsive printer 270 checking an unresponsive scanner 293 checking status of parts and supplies 234 checking the status of parts and supplies 234 checking the virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 251 checking virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 251 choosing a fax connection 112 cleaning ADF parts 229 exterior of the printer 228 interior of the printer 228 printhead lenses 232 scanner glass 229 Close front door 271 Close top access cover 271 collating copies 98 confidential print jobs 88 printing from a Macintosh computer 88 printing from Windows 88 Confidential Print menu 161 configuration information wireless network 48 Configure MP menu 139 configuring e mail settings 104 configuring port settings 55 connecting printer to distinctive ring service 114 connecting the printer to regional adapters 115 conservation settings brightness adjusting 220 Eco Mode 218 Hibernate Mode 220 Quiet Mode 218 Sleep Mode 219 conserving supplies 217 contacting customer support 323 control panel printer 14 copy quality adjusting 97 copy screen advanced options 103 options 101 102 103 128 Copy Setti
191. emains idle before automatically logging off the user Settings range from 1 120 minutes 10 minutes is the factory default setting Adjust the security settings Notes a retains all the security information that the user has defined No Security is the factory default setting e No Effect means the reset has no effect on the printer security configuration e Reset factory security defaults deletes all security information that the user has defined and restores the factory default settings in the Miscellaneous Security menu Allow the user to request a server certificate Notes e Demand means a server certificate is requested If a bad certificate is provided or if no certificate is provided then the session is terminated immediately Demand is the factory default setting Try means a server certificate is requested If no certificate is provided then the session proceeds normally If a bad certificate is provided then the session is terminated immediately Allow means a server certificate is requested If no certificate is provided then the session proceeds normally If a bad certificate is provided then it will be ignored and the session proceeds normally e Never means no server certificate is requested Limit the digit length of the personal identification number PIN Note 4 is the is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Conf
192. emove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it Refer service or repairs other than those described in the user documentation to a professional service person Safety information A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the interior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off an
193. emporary USB cable so you Can print wirelessly 7 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Note For more information on allowing other computers on the network to use the wireless printer see the Networking Guide Installing the printer on a wireless network Macintosh Note Make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable when installing the printer on a wireless network Prepare to configure the printer 1 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn the printer on 2 Locate the printer MAC address a From the printer control panel navigate to gt Reports gt gt Network Setup Page gt or gt Reports gt Network Setup Page b Inthe Standard Network Card section look for UAA MAC Note You will need this information later Additional printer setup 51 Enter the printer information 1 Access the AirPort options In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Network gt AirPort In Mac OS X version 10 4 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Internet Connect gt AirPort 2 From the Network Name pop up menu select print server yyyyyy where the y s are the last six digits of the MAC address located on the MAC address sheet 3 Opena Web browser 4 From the Bookmarks menu select Show or Show All Bookmarks 5 Under COLLECTIONS select Bonjour or Rendezvous and then
194. en a flash or printer hard disk is installed The menu setting reverts to its factory default value after each power on reset POR Resource Save Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads such as fonts and macros stored in the RAM when the printer receives a print job that requires more memory than is available Notes e Off is the factory default setting Off sets the printer to retain downloads only until memory is needed Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs On sets the printer to retain downloads during language changes and printer resets If the printer runs out of memory 38 Memory Full appears but downloads are not deleted Print All Order Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed Alphabetical when Print All Order is selected Oldest First Notes Newest First oe e Alphabetical is the factory default setting e Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel Understanding the printer menus Finishing menu Use Sides Duplex 1 sided 2 sided Duplex Binding Long Edge Short Edge Copies 1 999 Blank Pages Do Not Print Print Collate Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Separator Sheets Off Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Separator Source Tray x Manual Feeder 204 Specify whether two sided duplex printing is set as the default for all print jobs Notes e 1 sided is the factory default sett
195. enable both Voice Mail and the printer to answer calls you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer Troubleshooting 297 THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL 1 Dial the fax number 2 Scan the original document one page at a time Can send but not receive faxes Try one or more of the following LOAD PAPER If the tray is empty then load paper in the tray or feeder CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone rings before the printer answers If you have extension phones on the same line as the printer or subscribe to the telephone company s Distinctive Ring service then keep the Ring Delay setting at 4 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup 3 Inthe Rings to Answer field enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers 4 Click Submit REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the toner or print cartridge Can receive but not send faxes These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE On the home screen to
196. enu item appears only when a non defective flash memory card is installed Delete Downloads on Disk Delete downloads from the printer hard disk including all held jobs buffered jobs Delete Now and parked jobs Do Not Delete Notes e Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to return to the originating screen after the deletion Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu for touch screen printer models When selected in non touch screen printer models Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after the deletion Activate Hex Trace Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem Notes e When activated all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation and control codes are not executed e To exit or deactivate Hex Trace turn off or reset the printer Coverage Estimator Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page The estimate is Off printed on a separate page at the end of each print job On Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 211 XPS menu Print Error Pages Print a page containing information on errors including XML markup errors Note Off is the factory default setting On PDF menu Scale to Fit Scale page content to fit the selected paper size Yes Note No is the factory default setting No Annotations Print an
197. equired i i e Disabled is the factory default setting e Negotiate lets the SMTP server determine if SSL is used SMTP Server Authentication Specify the type of user authentication required for scan to e mai No authentication required privileges Login Plain Note No authentication required is the factory default setting CRAM MD5 Digest MD5 NTLM Kerberos 5 Understanding the printer menus 159 Device Initiated E mail Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP None server Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e mail Use Device SMTP Credentials Notes User Initiated E mail e None is the factory default setting for Device Initiated E mail and None User Initiated E mail Use Device SMTP Credentials e Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP Use Session User ID amp Password server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected Use Session E mail address amp Password Prompt User Device Userid Device Password Kerberos 5 Realm NTLM Domain Security menu Edit Security Setups menu Edit Backup Password Create a backup password Note This menu item appears only when a backup password exists Edit Building Blocks Edit the internal accounts NTLM various setups password and PIN Edit Security Templates Add or edit a security template Edit Access Controls Control access to printer menus firmware updates held jobs and other access
198. er If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel showing printer messages Viewing reports You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer the network and supplies To view reports from a network printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Reports and then click the type of report you want to view Setting up e mail alerts Configure the printer to send you e mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed or added or when there is a paper jam 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the
199. er cartridge Early Warning Low Invalid Near End of Life Replace Missing Defective OK Unsupported Understanding the printer menus 135 Black Cartridge View the status of the black toner cartridge Early Warning Low Invalid Near End of Life Replace Missing Defective OK Unsupported Cyan Photoconductor View the status of the cyan photoconductor Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Magenta Photoconductor View the status of the magenta photoconductor Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Yellow Photoconductor View the status of the yellow photoconductor Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Black Photoconductor View the status of the black photoconductor Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Separator Pick Assembly and Roller Vlew the status of the separator pick assembly and roller OK Replace Waste Toner Bottle View the status of the waste toner bottle Near Full Replace Missing OK Understanding the printer menus Fuser Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Transfer Module Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Paper menu Default Source menu Default Source Tray x MP Feeder Manual Paper Manual Envelope Paper Size Type menu Tray x Size A4 A5 JIS B5 Letter Legal Executive Oficio M xico Folio Universal 136 View the status of the fuser View the status of the transfer module Set a default paper source for all print jobs Notes e Tray 1 stan
200. er from the list and then click Add Setting up serial printing In serial printing data is transferred one bit at a time Although serial printing is usually slower than parallel printing it is the preferred option when there is a great deal of distance between the printer and computer or when an interface with a better transfer rate is not available Additional printer setup 57 After installing the serial or communication COM port configure the printer and the computer so they can communicate Make sure you have connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer 1 Set the parameters in the printer a From the printer control panel navigate to the menu with port settings b Locate the menu with serial port settings c Make any necessary changes to the serial settings d Save the new settings and then print a menu settings page 2 Install the printer driver a Insert the Software and Documentation CD If the installation screen does not appear after a minute then launch the CD manually 1 Click B or click Start and then click Run 2 Inthe Start Search or Run box type D setup exe where D is the letter of the CD or DVD drive 3 Press Enter or click OK b Click Advanced Options gt Custom Install c Follow the instructions on the computer screen From the Configure Printer Connection dialog select Connect through a port discovered on your computer and then select a port e Ifthe portis notin the list then
201. er size without size sensing 3 Paper size is supported if set to US 4 Paper size is supported if set to metric gt Paper size is supported if its length is between 8 27 in 210 mm and 14 in 355 6 mm and its width is between 5 5 in 139 7 mm and 8 5 in 215 9 mm 6 This size setting formats the envelope for 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in unless the size is specified by the software program 7 Turn Size Sensing off to support universal sizes that are close to standard paper or specialty media sizes Paper and specialty media guidelines 83 Supported paper types and weights The printer supports 60 220 g m 16 58 lb paper weights Note Labels transparencies envelopes and card stock always print at reduced speed Paper type SEOEL mele Optional Optional Multipurpose Manual Paper Manual optional 550 sheet 2 000 sheet feeder Envelope 550 sheet tray specialty media high capacity drawer feeder Paper Plain Bond Colored Letterhead Preprinted Light Glossy Heavy Heavy Glossy Recycled Card stock Labels e Paper e Vinyl Custom Type x Rough Cotton Printing 84 Printing The use of print preview and the selection of desired printing preferences such as duplex margins and paper size can ensure that the print job output will appear as desired Printing forms Use the Forms and Favorites application to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that is reg
202. es device settings solutions jobs faxes and passwords from the printer memory 4 Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Erasing printer hard disk memory Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by scan print copy and fax jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully powered up the touch screen displays a list of functions instead of the standard home screen icons 3 Touch Wipe Disk and then touch one of the following e Wipe disk fast This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass e Wipe disk secure This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times followed by a verification pass A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220 22 M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method 4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping Notes e A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task
203. eserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 5 Click OK or Print Printing 89 6 From the printer home screen release the print job e For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter the PIN gt Print e For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print For Macintosh users 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the print options or Copies amp Pages pop up menu choose Job Routing 3 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 4 Click OK or Print 5 From the printer home screen release the print job e For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter the PIN gt Print e For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print Printing information pages Printing a font sample list 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Print Fonts 2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts Printing a directory list A directory list shows the resour
204. essage on each page An overlay message can be placed on each page The message choices are Urgent Confidential Copy Custom or Draft To place a message on the copies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Overlay gt select overlay message gt ZS 4 Touch Copy It Canceling a copy job Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF When the ADF begins processing a document the scanning screen appears To cancel the copy job touch Cancel Job on the touch screen A Canceling scan job screen appears The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job Copying 101 Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen A Canceling scan job screen appears Once the job is canceled the copy screen appears Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed 1 From the home screen touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad 2 Touch the job you want to cancel 3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs Understanding the copy screens and options Copy from This option opens a screen where you c
205. essfully scanned page Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the scan job at the last successfully scanned page Note This does not cancel the scan job All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying faxing and e mailing 280 06 Paper missing Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Touch Cancel job to cancel the job and clear the message e Touch Scan from automatic feeder to resume the scan job from the ADF immediately following the last successfully scanned page Touch Scan from flatbed to resume the scan job from the scanner glass immediately following the last successfully scanned page Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the scan job at the last successfully scanned page Note This does not cancel the scan job All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying faxing or e mailing e Touch Restart job to clear the message and start a new scan job with the same settings as the previous job Troubleshooting 286 840 01 Scanner disabled by admin Print without the scanner or contact your system support person 840 02 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists Try one or more of the following Touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen and then contact your system support person e Touch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job Note Thi
206. estination of your e mail You may enter multiple e mail addresses Subject This option lets you enter a subject line for your e mail Message This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment File Name This option lets you customize the attachment file name Original Size This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e mail Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting The e mail screen appears with the new setting displayed e When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes Resolution Adjusts the output quality of your e mail Increasing the image resolution increases the e mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e mail file size E mailing 109 Color This option sets the output color for the scanned image Touch to enable or disable color Content This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphics e Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of te
207. etting Set the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP Note 1 5 is the factory default setting Specify the content of the original document Note Text Photo is the factory default setting Specify how the original document is produced Note Color Laser is the factory default setting Specify whether prints are in black and white or color Note Off is the factory default setting Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch dpi Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Darkness 1 9 Orientation Portrait Landscape Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A4 A5 A6 JIS BS Custom Scan Size x Book Original Business Card 3x 5in 4x 6 in Sides Duplex Off Long edge Short edge JPEG Quality Best for content 5 90 Text Default 5 90 Text Photo Default 5 90 es Lighten or darken the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Specify the orientation of the scanned image Note Portrait is the factory default setting Specify the paper size of the original document Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on a page Notes e Off is the factory default setting e Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge fo
208. ettings gt Quality Menu gt Print Mode gt Black Only gt Submit Adjusting toner darkness 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Print Settings gt Quality Menu gt Toner Darkness 3 Adjust the toner darkness setting 4 Click Submit Using Max Speed and Max Yield The Max Speed and Max Yield settings let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield Max Yield is the factory default setting e Max Speed This lets you print in either black or color depending on what is set in the printer driver The printer prints in color unless Black Only is selected in the printer driver e Max Yield This lets you switch from black to color based on the color content found on each page Frequent color mode switching can result in slower printing if the content of pages is mixed Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable
209. ettings for all settings associated with Eco Mode Off supports the performance specifications of the printer Reduce energy use especially when the printer is idle e Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed e The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity Energy Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes Plain Paper Enable the automatic two sided duplex feature e Turn off print log features 3 Click Submit Reducing printer noise To select a Quiet Mode setting using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Quiet Mode gt select a setting Saving money and the environment 219 Reduce printer noise e Print jobs will process at a reduced speed e Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print There will be a short delay before the first page is printed e If your printer has faxing capability then fax sounds are reduced or disabled including those made by the fax speaker and ringer The fax is placed
210. evice Solutions gt Solutions eSF or click Embedded Solutions 4 Click System tab gt Log 5 From the Filter menu select an application status 6 From the Application menu select an application and then click Submit Troubleshooting 301 Scan to Network troubleshooting The application icon is missing from the home screen MAKE SURE TO ENABLE AT LEAST ONE VALID DESTINATION DISPLAY THE APPLICATION ICON WHEN NO DESTINATIONS ARE AVAILABLE 1 From the Embedded Web Server click Settings or Configuration 2 Click Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF or click Embedded Solutions 3 Click the name of the application gt Configure 4 From the Home Screen Button section select Always show button under Display Option and then click Apply Printer cannot scan to the selected destination MAKE SURE THE DESTINATION IS VALID Verify that the destination is valid in the application configuration settings If the destination has been moved then the network address may have changed The destination network address can be accessed from the Embedded Web Server IF THE PRINTER AND DESTINATION RESIDE IN DIFFERENT DOMAINS THEN MAKE SURE THE DOMAIN INFORMATION IS SPECIFIED If the destination exists within a different Windows domain than the printer then you can edit the destination from the application configuration page and enter the appropriate Windows domain information in the domain field as part of the Network Folder Address You can also ad
211. exmark International Inc d clare que l appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latviski Ar o Lexmark International Inc deklar ka is izstr d jums atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saist tajiem noteikumiem 1999 5 EB direktyvos nuostatas Malti Bil pre enti Lexmark International Inc jiddikjara li dan il prodott huwa konformi mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma dispo izzjonijiet o rajn relevanti li jinsabu fid Direttiva 1999 5 KE iuo Lexmark International Inc deklaruoja kad is produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International Inc dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Norsk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International Inc o wiadcza e niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portugu s A Lexmark International Inc declara que este este produto est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Diretiva 1999 5 CE Slovensky Lexmark International Inc t mto vyhlasuje e tento produkt
212. f settings are not properly configured Linking trays 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Loading paper and specialty media 75 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu 3 Change the paper type and size settings of the tray so that they match the settings of any other tray and then click Submit Creating a custom name for a paper type If the printer is on a network then use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type x for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Navigate to Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Name gt type a name gt Submit Note The custom name will replace Custom Type x under the Custom Types and Paper Size and Type menus 3 Navigate to Custom Types gt select a paper type gt Submit Assigning a custom paper type name Assign a custom
213. fax when you click OK on the Fax tab Sending a fax using shortcuts Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine A shortcut number 1 99999 can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients 1 2 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not place postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Faxing 119 3 Press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad 4 Touch Fax It Sending a fax using the address book The address book enables you to search for bookmarks and network directory servers Note If the address book feature is not enabled then contact your system support person 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt ia 3 Touch Browse shortcuts or using the virtual keyboard type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find
214. for incoming fax jobs Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs Specify where the printer will pick the separator sheet Specify an exit bin for received faxes Note Bin 1 is available only when a finisher is installed Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax Note Off is the factory default setting Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received Understanding the printer menus 185 Fax Forwarding Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient Print Print and Forward Forward Forward to Specify the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded Fax Note This menu is available only from the Embedded Web Server E mail FTP LDSS eSF Forward to Shortcut Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type Fax E mail FTP LDSS or eSF Block No Name Fax Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified On Banned Fax List Enable the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer Holding Faxes Enable fax holding all of the time or according to set schedule Held Fax Mode Off Always On Manual e For more information see Holding faxes on page 123 Scheduled Fax Holding Schedule Notes e Off is the factory default setting Enable Color Fax Receive Enable the printer to receive fax in color Fax Log Settings Transmission Log Enable printing of a transmis
215. formation see Accessing the system board on page 26 Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 2 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board leaving the cable attached to the printer hard disk To unplug the cable squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling the cable out PN 3 Remove the screws that connect the printer hard disk to the system board cage Additional printer setup 42 4 Remove the printer hard disk by pulling it upward to unseat the standoffs 5 Set the printer hard disk aside 6 Reattach the system board cover Installing hardware options Order of installation A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters AN CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the prin
216. g e For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Cannot scan from a computer These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer Troubleshooting 295 Solving fax problems Fax and e mail functions are not set up The indicator light blinks red until you set up fax and e mail To set up fax and e mail follow these steps Note Before completing these instructions for a printer on a network make sure the fax cables are connected 1 From the home screen navigate to gt General Settings gt Run initial setup gt Yes gt Submit 2 Turn the printer off and then turn it back on 3 From the printer control panel touch your language 4 Touch your country or region and then touch Continue 5 Select your time zone and then touch Continue 6 Touch Fax and E mail to clear the icons and then touch Continue Note You can use these same steps to disable fax and e mail Caller ID is not shown Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service If your region supports multiple caller ID
217. ged by large temperature differentials across its length CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT Ifthe problem continues then the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact customer support Troubleshooting 289 Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE SETTINGS Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the paper type and paper size settings 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the paper type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the paper type from the Print dialog Incorrect characters print e Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode If Ready Hex appears on the display you must exit Hex Trace mode before you can print your job Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode e Make sure the SmartSwitch settings are set to On in the Network and USB menus Tray linking does not work These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER e Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked e Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray Use THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS e Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray e f necessary adjust the settings from the P
218. han one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters 1 Unpack the optional drawer and then remove all packing material Note Optional drawers lock together when stacked Remove stacked drawers one at a time from the top to the bottom 2 Place the drawer near the printer 3 Turn off the printer 4 Align the printer with the drawer and then lower the printer into place Note A caster base and up to four spacers are supported in any printer configuration For information on installing the caster base and spacer see the instruction sheet that came with the option Additional printer setup 44 pa Optional 550 sheet specialty media drawer Optional 550 sheet drawer Note This drawer is standard in the X748dte printer model 3 Optional 2000 sheet drawer 5 Turn the printer back on Attaching cables A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm Additional printer setup 1 Open the access door by pulling it out to the right I L llu 2 Match the appropriate cable to the corresponding port 1 Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the USB cable any netwo
219. hange Paper appearing Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Specify the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Specify the relative weight of the heavy glossy paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 141 Use To Vinyl Labels Weight Specify the relative weight of the vinyl labels loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Bond Weight Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Envelope Weight Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Rough Envelope Weight Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Letterhead Weight Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded Light Note N
220. he ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Copying 96 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt size of the original document gt Copy to 4 Touch Manual Feeder or select the tray that contains the paper type you want to use Note If you choose Manual Feeder then you will also need to select the paper size and type 5 Touch Copy It Copying different paper sizes Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the Copy to and Copy from settings each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes Example 1 or scaled to fit a single paper size Example 2 Example 1 Copying on mixed paper sizes 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt Mixed Sizes gt ZS gt Copy to gt Auto Size Match gt ZS gt Copy It The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document Example 2 Copying on a
221. he display 6 Click Submit 7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit You can use this shortcut number when you are ready to scan your documents a Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass b If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides c Press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad or touch Held Jobs on the home screen and then touch Profiles d After entering the shortcut number the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program you specified If you touched Profiles on the home screen then locate your shortcut on the list 8 Return to the computer to view the file The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified Scanning to a flash drive 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Insert the flash drive into th
222. he original document is from a magazine e Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper Scanning 132 e Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation and Binding e Sides Duplex Use this to specify if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e mail e Orientation Use this to specify the orientation of the original document and then change Sides and Binding to match the orientation e Binding Use this to specify if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge of the page Scan Preview This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e mail When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Advanced Options Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings e Advanced Imaging Use to change or adjust Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness an
223. he printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol e On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs Display and set the printer network settings Note The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network Understanding the printer menus 148 Reports menu To access the menu navigate to any of the following e Network Ports menu gt Networks Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt Reports e Network Ports menu gt Networks Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Reports Use ie Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address Network Card menu To access the menu navigate to any of the following e Network Ports menu gt Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt Network Card e Network Ports menu gt Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Network Card View Card Status View the connection status of the network card Connected Disconnected View Card Speed View the speed of an active network card Network Address View the network addresses UAA LAA Job Timeout Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled 0 10 255 seconds Notes
224. he sharpness of a fax Note 3 is the factory default setting Enable the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Enable color faxing Note Off by default is the factory default setting Convert all outgoing faxes to black and white Note On is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Fax Receive Settings Fax Job Waiting None Toner Toner and Supplies Rings to Answer 1 25 Auto Reduction Paper Source Auto Tray x Multi Purpose Feeder Sides Duplex On Separator Sheets Off Before Job After Job Separator Sheet Source Tray x Manual Feeder Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Fax Footer On Max Speed 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 184 Se Allow the printer to receive fax jobs Note On is the factory default setting Remove fax jobs that request specific unavailable resources from the print queue Note None is the factory default setting Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job Note 3 is the factory default setting Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax source Note On is the factory default setting Specify the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an incoming fax Enable two sided duplex printing
225. hort edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Options gt Custom Job gt On gt Done gt Copy It When the end of a set is reached the scan screen appears Copying 100 4 Load the next document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed Note If required change the job settings 5 If you have another document to scan then repeat the previous step Otherwise touch Finish the job Placing information on copies Placing the date and time at the top of each page 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Header Footer 4 Pick an area of the page where you want to place the date and time 5 Touch Yes or No gt Si gt Copy It Placing an overlay m
226. iate paper or specialty media in the proper tray e Confirm that the wheel on tray 1 is set to the paper size loaded in the tray Make sure this size is the size you are trying to print Touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray e Check length and width guides of the tray and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray e Make sure the Print Properties or Print dialog settings have the correct paper size and type e Check that the paper size is correctly set For example if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed Cancel the print job 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing e To enable Resource Save after receiving this message make sure the link buffers are set to Auto and then exit the menus to activate the link buffer changes When Ready appears enable Resource Save Install additional memory 37 Insufficient memory to collate job Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job Cancel the current print job Troubleshooting 278 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing e Delete f
227. idential Print menu Use Max Invalid PIN Off 2 10 Confidential Job Expiration Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Repeat Job Expiration Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Verify Job Expiration Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Reserve Job Expiration Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week To Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered Notes e This menu appears only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed e Once the limit is reached the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted Limit the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deleted Notes e Ifthe Confidential Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside in the printer RAM or printer hard disk then the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value e Ifthe printer is turned off then all confidential jobs held in the printer RAM are deleted Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time Note Off is the factory default setting Disk Wiping menu Disk Wiping erases only print job data in the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system All permanent data in the printer hard disk are retained such as
228. ies e For Macintosh users check this setting from the Print dialog Print is too light Troubleshooting 312 Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DARKNESS BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST SETTINGS The Toner Darkness setting may be too light the Brightness setting may be too light or the Contrast setting may be too low e Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu e For Windows users change these settings from Print Properties e For Macintosh users 1 Choose File gt Print 2 From the print options pop up menu choose Printer Features 3 Choose a higher value for the Toner Darkness Brightness and Contrast settings LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE The paper may have absorbed moisture from high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder e From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting e For Windows users check this setting from Print Properties e For Macintosh users check this setting from the Print dialog MAKE SURE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER 1 Remove the cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back sever
229. ies can be reduced to 25 of the original document size or enlarged to 400 of the original document size The factory default setting for Scale is Auto If you leave Scale set to Auto the content of your original document will be scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying To reduce or enlarge a copy 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 From the Scale area touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies Touching Copy to or Copy from after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto 5 Touch Copy It Adjusting copy quality 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Content 4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying Text Use when the conte
230. in standby mode e The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned off e The printer will ignore the Advance Start command Off Use factory default settings This setting supports the Note Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable Performance specifications of the printer Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing 3 Click Submit Adjusting Sleep mode To save energy decrease the number of minutes the printer waits before it enters Sleep mode Available settings range from 1 180 minutes The factory default setting is 30 minutes Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts 3 Inthe Sleep Mode field enter the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts gt Sleep Mode 2 Inthe Sleep Mode field select the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode 3 Touch SA Saving money and the e
231. inal adapter then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use Notes Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region Depending on the ISDN port assignment you may have to connect to a specific port When using a PBX system make sure the call waiting tone is off When using a PBX system dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number For more information on using the fax with a PBX system see the documentation that came with your PBX system Connecting to a distinctive ring service A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider This service allows you to have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line with each telephone number having a different ring pattern This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack Faxing 115 3 Change the Distinctive Rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer Note The factory def
232. information varies by country or region e Inthe US See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer or at http support lexmark com e In other countries and regions See the printed warranty that came with your printer Selecting a location for the printer A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely When selecting a location for the printer leave enough room to open trays covers and doors If you plan to install any options then leave enough room for them also It is important to Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet e Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee 156 standard e Provide a flat sturdy and stable surface Keep the printer Clean dry and free of dust Away from stray staples and paper clips Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners heaters or ventilators Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes e Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations Ambient temperature 15 6 32 2 C 60 90 F Storage temperature 40 to 40 C 40 to 104 F e Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation Learning about the printer 11 Ca rent zsmmusn a fiersa icon ain Ca frer fr
233. ing e When two sided printing is selected and the media is not the same on both sides the media must be loaded in the trays in a different orientation When two sided printing is selected and the media is not the same on both sides the media must be loaded in the trays in a different orientation e You can set two sided printing in the software program For Windows users click File gt Print and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup For Macintosh users choose File gt Print and then adjust the settings from the print dialog and pop up menus Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to paper orientation Notes e Long Edge is the factory default setting Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape e Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Specify the default number of copies for each print job Note 1 is the factory default setting Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies Notes e Off is the factory default setting e On stacks the print job in sequence Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted Notes e Off is the factory default setting Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a p
234. ing Potential Damage Do not touch the USB cable any network adapter any connector the memory device or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing reading or writing from the memory device A loss of data can occur Printing 87 2 From the printer control panel touch the document you want to print 3 Touch the arrows to specify the number of copies for printing and then touch Print Notes Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing e If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen then you can still print files from the flash drive as held jobs Supported flash drives and file types JENAR File type e Lexar JumpDrive 2 0 Pro 256MB 512MB or 1GB sizes Documents e SanDisk Cruzer Mini 256MB 512MB or 1GB sizes pdf Notes D Images e Hi Speed USB flash drives must support the full speed standard Devices supporting only USB low speed capabilities are not supported dcx gif e USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table FAT system Devices formatted with New Technology File System NTFS or any other file system are not supported JPEG or jpg bmp PCx TIFF or tif png fis Printing 88 Printing confidential and other held jobs Storing print jobs in the printer 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Security gt Confidential Print Print job typ
235. ing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Advanced Status Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port Notes e On is the factory default setting e Off disables parallel port negotiation Understanding the printer menus Use Protocol Standard Fastbytes Honor Init Parallel Mode 2 ENA Address YYY YYY YYY YYY ENA Netmask YYY YYY YYY YYY ENA Gateway YYY YYY YYY YYY Serial x menu 155 E Specify the parallel port protocol Notes e Fastbytes is the factory default setting It provides compatibility with most existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the computer Notes e Off is the factory default setting e The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the parallel port Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the computer is turned on Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a strobe Note On is the factory default setting Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol
236. ing on transparencies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt select the size of the original document gt ZS 4 Touch Copy to gt select the tray that contains transparencies gt Copy It 5 If there are no trays that support transparencies then select Manual Feeder and then touch ZS 6 Select the desired size of the transparencies and then select a Manual Feeder type 7 Load transparencies in the multipurpose feeder and then touch Copy It Copying on letterhead 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Copying 95 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt size of the original document gt Copy to gt Manual Feeder 4 Place the letterhead faceup top edge first in the multipurpose feeder 5 Select the size of the letterhead 6 Navigat
237. ing the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding the printer menus Job Buffering Protocol DTR DTR DSR XON XOFF XON XOFF DTR XONXOFF DTRDSR Robust XON Baud 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 138200 172800 230400 345600 Data Bits 7 8 157 Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes Off is the factory default setting The printer does not buffer print jobs on the printer hard disk On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Select the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port Notes e DTR is the factory default setting DTR DSR is a hardware handshaking setting e XON XOFF is a software handshaking setting e XON XOFF DTR and XON XOFF DTR DSR are combined hardware and software handshaking settings Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to XON XOFF Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port Notes e 9600 is the factory default setting e 138200 17280
238. inters to reduce their impact on the environment We design with the environment in mind engineer our packaging to reduce materials and provide collection and recycling programs For more information see e The Notices chapter e The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment e The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle By selecting certain printer settings or tasks you may be able to reduce your printer s impact even further This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit Saving paper and toner Studies show that as much as 80 of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting see Using Eco Mode on page 218 Using recycled paper As an environmentally conscious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser printers For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer see Using recycled paper and other office papers on page 79 Conserving supplies There are a number of ways you can reduce the amount of paper and toner you
239. ion and continue printing e Format the flash memory If the error message remains the flash memory may be defective and require replacing 54 Network x software error Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to continue printing e Turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on e Upgrade flash the network firmware in the printer 54 Serial option x error Try one or more of the following Check that the serial cable is properly connected and is the correct one for the serial port e Check that the serial interface parameters protocol baud parity and data bits are set correctly on the printer and host computer e Touch Continue to continue printing e Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer 54 Standard network software error Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to continue printing Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer e Upgrade flash the network firmware in the printer or print server 55 Unsupported option in slot x 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board and then replace it with a supported card 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Troubleshooting 280 56 Parallel port x disabled Try one or more of the following e Touch
240. ions and is not damaged e Make sure the guides are positioned correctly for the paper size loaded Memory card Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board Cannot detect flash memory card Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board Cannot detect printer hard disk Make sure the printer hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board Troubleshooting 305 Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly Try one or more of the following CHECK THE INTERNAL SOLUTIONS Port ISP CONNECTIONS Make sure the ISP is securely connected to the printer system board CHECK THE CABLE Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected to the Internal Solutions ISP port MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY For information on installing the network printing software see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD Internal print server does not operate correctly Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PRINT SERVER CONNECTIONS e Make sure the internal print server is attached securely to the printer system board e Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY For more information on installing the network printing software do the following 1 Open the Software and Documentation CD 2 Click Ad
241. is removed from your premises e Degaussing Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data e Crushing Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable e Milling Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits Note Most data can be erased electronically but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored Erasing volatile memory The volatile memory RAM installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information To erase the buffered data simply turn off the printer Erasing non volatile memory e Individual settings device and network settings security settings and embedded solutions Erase information and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu e Fax data Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully powered up the touch screen displays a list of functions instead of the standard home screen icons Securing the printer 225 3 Touch Wipe All Settings The printer will restart several times during this process Note Wipe All Settings securely remov
242. it Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors Additional printer setup 28 3 Reattach the system board cover Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors Additional printer setup a Align the keyholes with the screws 29 Additional printer setup 30 Installing a memory card A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board 1 Access the system board For more information see Accessing the system board on page 26 Note This
243. it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Print Settings gt Setup Menu 3 From the Printer Usage list select Max Speed or Max Yield 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt Print Settings gt Setup Menu 2 From the Printer Usage list select Max Speed or Max Yield 3 Touch Submit Printing 86 Printing from a mobile device For the list of supported mobile devices and to download a compatible mobile printing application visit http lexmark com mobile Note Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer Printing from a flash drive Printing from a flash drive Notes Before printing an encrypted PDF file you will be prompted to enter the file password from the printer control panel e You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions 1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port Notes e A flash drive icon appears on the home screen and in the held jobs icon when a flash drive is installed e If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention such as when a jam has occurred then the printer ignores the flash drive e If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs then Busy appears After these print jobs are processed you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive Warn
244. itch PS SmartSwitch NPA Mode USB Buffer Disabled Auto 3K to maximum size allowed 152 lt a Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to Off Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes e Auto is the factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then process it appropriately e The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer control panel The menu selection is then updated Set the size of the USB input buffer No
245. ith the correct paper type and size then it prints from the default paper source Cancel the print job Troubleshooting 274 Load paper source with paper size Try one or more of the following e Load the tray or feeder with the correct paper size e From the printer control panel touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size then it feeds from the default paper source Cancel the print job Load paper source with paper type paper size Try one or more of the following e Load the tray or feeder with the correct paper size and type e From the printer control panel touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size then it feeds from the default paper source Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with custom type name Try one or more of the following e Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type e From the printer control panel touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing e Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the t
246. ivid SRGB Display Display True Black SRGB Vivid Off RGB Graphics Vivid SRGB Display Display True Black SRGB Vivid Off 207 a Adjust color in printed output by increasing or decreasing the amount of toner being used for each color Note 0 is the factory default setting Print sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the printer Notes e Selecting any setting prints the sample e Color samples consist of a series of colored boxes along with the RGB or CMYK combination that creates the color observed These pages can be used to help decide which combinations to use to get the desired printed output e To access a complete list of color sample pages from the Embedded Web Server open a Web browser and then type the IP address of the printer in the address field Customize the RGB color conversions Notes sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image This applies a color conversion table to an output that matches the colors displayed on a computer monitor sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics sRGB Vivid applies a color table that increases saturation This is preferred for business graphics and text Vivid applies a color conversion table that produces brighter more saturated colors Display True Black applies a color conversion table that uses only black toner for neutral gray colors Off turns off color conversion U
247. kground Removal Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image 4 to 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting Color Balance Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Understanding the printer menus Use Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast Best for content 0 5 Mirror Image On Negative Image On Shadow Detail 4 to 4 Scan edge to edge On Sharpness 0 5 Temperature 4 to 4 Enable Color Fax Scans Off by default On by default Never use Always use Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono Faxes 183 S Specify which color to drop and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specify the contrast in the scanned image Note Best for content is the factory default setting Create a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Create a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible Note 0 is the factory default setting Specify if the original document is scanned edge to edge prior to faxing Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust t
248. kmarks Create organize and save a set of bookmarks URL into a tree view of folders and file links Note The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function and not from any other application Held Jobs Display all current held jobs Understanding the home screen 17 Other buttons that may appear on the home screen Touch Ae Search held jobs Search on any of the following items e User name for held or confidential print jobs e Job names for held jobs excluding confidential print jobs e Profile names Bookmark container or print job names e USB container or print job names for supported file types Release Held Fax Access the list of held faxes Note This button appears only when there are held faxes with a scheduled hold time previously set Lock Device Open a password entry screen Enter the correct password to lock the printer control panel Note This button appears only when the printer is unlocked and password has been set Unlock Device Open a password entry screen Enter the correct password to unlock the printer control panel Note This button appears only when the printer is locked The printer control panel buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while this appears Cancel Jobs Open the Cancel Jobs screen The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings Print Fax and Network The following options are available under the Print Fax and Network headings e Print job e Copy job e F
249. lash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option Make sure the flash option is properly formatted and is not read write or password protected Download shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM All shows all fonts available to any option Identify a specific font and where it is stored Note Courier 10 is the factory default setting Specify the symbol set for each font name Notes e 10U PC 8 is the US factory default setting 12U PC 850 is the international factory default setting e Asymbol set is a set of alphabetical and numeric characters punctuation and special symbols Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text Only the supported symbol sets are shown Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts Notes e 12 is the factory default setting e Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font One point equals approximately 0 014 of an inch This can be increased or decreased in 0 25 point increments Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts Notes 10 is the factory default setting Pitch refers to the number of fixed space characters per inch cpi This can be increased or decreased in 0 01 cpi increments For non scalable monospaced fonts the pitch appears on the display but cannot be changed Specify the orientation of text and graphics on a page Notes e Portrait is the factory default se
250. led until fax is configured properly Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message e Complete the Analog Fax Setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Insert Tray x Insert the specified tray into the printer Install Tray x Try one or more of the following Install the specified tray 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Install the specified tray 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Cancel the print job Load paper source with custom type name Try one or more of the following e Load the tray or feeder with the correct paper type and size e From the printer control panel touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size then it prints from the default paper source e Cancel the print job Load paper source with custom string Try one or more of the following e Load the tray or feeder with the correct paper type and size e From the printer control panel touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray w
251. lications gt Utilities Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the Printer List click Add Click Default Browser tab gt More Printers From the first pop up menu select AppleTalk O UAWN From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk Zone 7 Select the printer from the list and then click Add Note If the printer does not show up in the list then you may need to add it using the IP address For more information contact your system support person Additional printer setup 55 Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP is installed in the printer the printer configurations on computers that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address All computers that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address Notes e If the printer has a static IP address then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations e If the computers are configured to use network name that will stay the same instead of by IP address then you do not need to make any changes to your computer configurations e If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for a wired connection then make sure the wired network is disconnected when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly If the wired connection remains connected then the wireless configuration will c
252. lor Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast Best for content 0 5 Mirror Image On Negative Image On 192 E Copy in a single copy job a document that contains mixed paper sizes Notes e Offis the factory default setting e Only appears when a printer hard disk is installed Note Off is the factory default setting Specify whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Save e mail addresses as shortcuts Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e mail Destination screen Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Enable an equal balance of colors in the output Specify which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specify the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Create a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Create a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus
253. m then contact customer support Forms and Favorites troubleshooting Forms are not available or are not working MAKE SURE THE BOOKMARK POINTING TO THE FORM IS IN THE BOOKMARKS ROOT FOLDER If the bookmark pointing to the form was created in a subfolder of the Bookmarks folder then it will not be available under the Forms solution Delete the bookmark and recreate it under the Bookmarks root folder MAKE SURE THE BOOKMARK IS POINTING TO THE CORRECT LOCATION The printer does not validate bookmarks If the URL or network location that was specified when the bookmark was created is incorrect then the printer will not be able to access the document MAKE SURE THE BOOKMARK IS CREATED WITH FORMS AND FAVORITES If the bookmark is created using another application then it cannot be accessed in Forms and Favorites Troubleshooting 300 A network destination stopped working or is invalid MAKE SURE THE PRINTER AUTHENTICATION IS CONFIGURED If the application is configured to use MFP authentication credentials then the printer authentication settings must be configured from the Embedded Web Server For more information on configuring the printer authentication settings see the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide available on www lexmark com MAKE SURE DESTINATION IS SHARED AND HAS A VALID NETWORK ADDRESS Check that the folder or source file is set to be shared across the network If the destination has been moved then the network address m
254. mat the printer hard disk and clear the message Note Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk Error reading USB drive Remove USB An unsupported flash drive is inserted Remove the flash drive and then install a supported one Fax memory full There is not enough memory to send the fax job Touch Continue to clear the message Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator The fax partition appears to be corrupted Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer If the message appears again then contact your system support person Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator The printer is in Fax Server mode but the Fax Server setup has not been completed Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message e Complete the Fax Server setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Fax Station Name not set up The Fax Station Name has not been entered Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message e Complete the Analog Fax Setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Troubleshooting 273 Fax Station Number not set up The Fax Station Number has not been entered Sending and receiving faxes is disab
255. mbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings 3 In the Screen Brightness field enter the brightness percentage you want for the display 4 Click Submit Saving money and the environment 221 Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Screen Brightness 2 In the Screen Brightness field enter the brightness percentage you want for the display 3 Touch SA Restoring factory default settings If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference then print a menu settings page before restoring the factory default settings For more information see Printing a menu settings page on page 58 If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings then perform the Wipe All Settings option For more information see Erasing non volatile memory on page 224 Warning Potential Damage Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings Exceptions include the display language custom sizes and messages and network port menu settings All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not affected From the home screen navigate to gt Se
256. mulate climates from all over the world e Moisture content Business papers should have low moisture 4 5 Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer e Thickness impacts how much can be loaded into a tray e Surface roughness measured in Sheffield units impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper e Surface friction determines how easily sheets can be separated e Grain and formation impacts curling which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves through the printer Brightness and texture look and feel Recycled papers are better than ever however the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control over foreign matter And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner they are not perfect The energy required to de ink and deal with additives such as colorants and glue often generates more carbon emissions than does normal paper production However using recycled papers enables better resource management overall Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products To gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment the company commissioned a number of life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor up to 80 of carbon emissions caused throughou
257. multiple scanning jobs into a single job e Edge Erase Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan e Transmission Log Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log Faxing 111 Note The fax function is available only in select printer models Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Getting the printer ready to fax The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions Note During the initial printer setup clear fax and any other function you plan to set up later and then touch Continue The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm Warning Potential Damage Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax Mi EU
258. n a wired network These instructions apply to Ethernet and fiber optic network connections Note Make sure you have completed the initial setup of the printer 52 Additional printer setup 53 For Windows users 1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD If the installation screen does not appear after a minute then launch the CD manually a Click oe or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type D Setup exe where D is the letter of the CD or DVD drive c Press Enter or click OK 2 Click Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen Note To configure the printer using a static IP address IPv6 or scripts select Advanced Options gt Administrator Tools 3 Select Ethernet connection and then click Continue 4 Attach the appropriate cable to the computer and to the printer when instructed to do so 5 Select the printer from the list and then click Continue Note If the configured printer does not appear on the list then click Modify Search 6 Follow the instructions on the computer screen For Macintosh users 1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer 2 Obtain the printer IP address e From the printer home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu e By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers
259. n and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment CE Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries but is restricted to indoor use only Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below Spole nost Lexmark International Inc t mto prohla uje ze v robek tento v robek je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES Dansk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produkt overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Deutsch Hiermit erkl rt Lexmark International Inc dass sich das Ger t dieses Ger t in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet 2YMMOPOONETAI MPO TI OYZIOAEI2 ANAITH EI KAI TI
260. n under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Other Settings click Manage Shortcuts gt E mail Shortcut Setup 4 Type a unique name for the recipient and then enter the e mail address Note If you are entering multiple addresses then separate each address with a comma 5 Select the scan settings Format Content Color and Resolution 6 Enter a shortcut number and then click Add If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number Creating an e mail shortcut using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient gt type an e mail address To create a group of recipients touch Next address and then type the next recipient s e mail address 2 Touch i 3 Type a unique name for the shortcut and then touch Done 4 Verify that the shortcut name is correct and then touch OK If the shortcut name is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information E mailing 106 E mailing a document Sending an e mail using the printer control panel 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass
261. nd repair or if the product is not free of all legal obligations restrictions liens and encumbrances Before you present this product for warranty service remove all print cartridges programs data and removable storage media unless directed otherwise by Lexmark For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web at www lexmark com support Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee Notices 339 Extent of limited warranty Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by Modification or unauthorized attachments Accidents misuse abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user s guides manuals instructions or guidance Unsuitable physical or operating environment Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications Refurbishment repair refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products supplies or parts Products supplies parts materials such as
262. nd requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant See your setup documentation for more information The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected toa telephone line Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact your local telephone company For products approved after July 23 2001 the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQ HTXXXX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point for example 03 is a REN of 0 3 For earlier products the REN is shown separately on the label If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment If
263. nderstanding the printer menus 208 Manual Color Customize the CMYK color conversions CMYK Image US CMYK Euro CMYK e US CMYK is the US factory default setting US CMYK applies a color conversion table that tries to produce output that matches SWOP color output Notes Vivid CMYK Off Euro CMYK is the international factory default setting Euro CMYK applies a color conversion table that tries to produce output that matches EuroScale color CMYK Text output US CMYK Euro CMYK Vivid CMYK Off CMYK Graphics US CMYK Euro CMYK Vivid CMYK Off Spot Color Replacement Provide the capability to assign specific CMYK values to named spot colors Color Adjust Initiate a recalibration of color conversion tables and allow the printer to make adjustments for color variations in output Vivid CMYK increases color saturation for the US CMYK color conversion table Off turns off color conversion Notes e Calibrating starts when the menu is selected Calibrating appears on the display until the process is finished e Color variations in output sometimes result from changeable conditions such as room temperature and humidity Color adjustments are made on printer algorithms Color alignment is also recalibrated in this process Job Accounting menu Note This menu item appears only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Make sure the printer hard disk is not read write or write protected Job Accounti
264. ng Log Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives Note Off is the factory default setting On Job Accounting Utilities Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive Accounting Log Frequency Determine and set how often a log file is created Weekly Note Monthly is the factory default setting Monthly Understanding the printer menus 209 Use To Log Action at End of Frequency Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires None Note None is the factory default setting E mail Current Log E mail amp Delete Current Log Post Current Log Post amp Delete Current Log Disk Near Full Level Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near Off Full Action 1 99 Note 5 is the factory default setting Disk Near Full Action Determine and set how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full None Notes E mail Current Log E mail amp Delete Current Log e None is the factory default setting E mail amp Delete Oldest Log e The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is Post Current Log triggered Post amp Delete Current Log Post amp Delete Oldest Log Delete Current Log Delete Oldest Log Delete All Logs Delete All But Current Disk Full Action Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum None limit 100MB E mail amp
265. ng on that portion of the scan e Transmission Log Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log e Custom Job Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job Scanning to a computer or flash drive Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile from the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer Scanning to a computer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Scan Profile gt Create 3 Select your scan settings and then click Next 4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file Scanning 130 5 Enter a scan name The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on t
266. ng the system board on page 26 2 Unpack the card Warning Potential Damage Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card 3 Holding the card by its sides align the plastic pins 1 on the card with the holes 2 on the system board wes BP 4 Push the card firmly into place Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to damage the connectors Note The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board 5 Reattach the system board cover Note When the printer software and any options are installed it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs For more information see Updating available options in the printer driver on page 47 Additional printer setup 33 Installing an Internal Solutions Port The system board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP An CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any
267. ngs menu 174 copy troubleshooting copier does not respond 290 partial document or photo copies 292 poor copy quality 290 poor scanned image quality 293 scanner unit does not close 290 copying adding a date and time stamp 100 adding an overlay message 100 adjusting quality 97 canceling a copy job 100 101 collating copies 98 custom job job build 99 different paper sizes 96 enlarging 97 in black and white 95 multiple pages on one sheet 99 341 on both sides of the paper duplexing 96 on letterhead 94 on transparencies 94 photos 94 placing separator sheets between copies 98 quick copy 93 reducing 97 selecting a tray 95 to a different size 95 using the ADF 93 using the scanner glass flatbed 94 copying different paper sizes 96 copying multiple pages on one sheet 99 copying on both sides of the paper duplexing 96 copying on letterhead 94 copying on transparencies 94 copying photos 94 creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 117 creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 125 creating profiles using the ScanBack Utility 130 custom name configuring 75 Custom Names menu 144 custom paper type name assigning 75 creating 75 Custom Scan Sizes menu 144 Custom Type x changing name 75 changing paper type 75 Custom Types menu 143 D date and time fax setting 116 daylight saving time faxing 116 Default Source menu 136 different paper sizes copying 96 directory list
268. niabiecebiaeseceeaenoiacsee oO MAKNE CODIE secessttyceteeaacacets A AET a E EE EE EEA 93 Copying MODNO Sicieenn aa lepace Gunwadiendaceuas rie a cats tank a 94 COpyiNE ON Specialty Medidas a a ee een 94 CUSEONTIZINEG CODY SCTE ES reese n a N EAS 95 Placing MOMAN ON CODIE Siniri a E E E E ie 100 canceling a CODY OD oriras nen E cee eeeaete hehe eet 100 Understanding the copy screens and ODllONS xiisi sasetessdiicichorsin cetianevseiieeionniicwauwe ones 101 AET aY E E E EE E E E E E E E LOG Getting ready to E Maleisia n a oa ees ie ee hee es ee oes 104 Creatine aiie Ii all SMORUC Utena a A eee eee ee ete eke 105 Bealls ar O OCU MONI asea catia eascassevewin eect onsen ct aaedandeoantantandsvdeic dias te tuteedstde a aa TE 106 CUSEOMIZI NE Mall SOUUIN SS esse Accanautcedascersdnccibihesheaeidacusanieneap a T A 107 Canceline AV ORI Vell soit sige sas tee area av ea ta re veg ern sha ta A aos ee 108 Understandihe e mail OOUIOMS wicstenceseccsasedeadcssupheeasesesunyenjeiesesaealeyduaneovacnntaneubacseaternmaeensatineomeeauenns 108 FAMINE vows senses A E E A A E E L D Gentine TAG printerteddy tofa Keer A unin Gueoneaeaaenceouiceuena sees panes ecuspeaneren 111 Creatine SNOLUCUUS eniinn E E E E E EERE EREE EE A N 117 Contents A SOM cdi eaa a a A Ta 117 Customizing Tax SeN GS icetiscindretereteennsetnuemectede a E A T A ekouemane tee 119 Cancelne oN OUtEONE TKa A 121 Understanding Tax OPUONS oerein toa a a a i a a aa 121 Holdinge and TOrw
269. nor does it provide any sort of warranty Above all it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom s network services This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom s 111 Emergency Service This equipment may not provide for the effective hand over of a call to another device connected to the same line This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom s telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom s specifications e There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation and e The equipment shall go on hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt e The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another Using this product in Switzerland This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter Lexmark p
270. notations in a PDF Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print PostScript menu Print PS Error Print a page containing the PostScript error Note Off is the factory default setting Enable users to disable the SysStart file Note Off is the factory default setting Font Priority Establish the font search order Resident Flash Disk Notes Resident is the factory default setting This menu item appears only when a formatted non defective flash memory option card or printer hard disk is installed Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not read write write or password protected Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100 Image Smoothing Enhance the contrast and sharpness of low resolution images and smoothen their color transitions Notes e Off is the factory default setting e Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in resolution Understanding the printer menus PCL Emul menu Use Font Source Resident Disk Download Flash All Font Name Courier 10 Symbol Set 10U PC 8 12U PC 850 PCL Emulation Settings Point Size 1 00 1008 00 PCL Emulation Settings Pitch 0 08 100 00 PCL Emulation Settings Orientation Portrait Landscape 212 Specify the set of fonts used in the Font Name menu Notes e Resident is the factory default setting It shows the factory default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM F
271. ns When the printer Color Correction setting is set to Off the color is based on the print job information and no color conversion is implemented Note The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations Additionally certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management The resulting printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages What are detailed Color Samples and how do I access them Detailed Color Samples sets are available only through the Embedded Web Server of a network printer A detailed Color Samples set contains a range of shades displayed as colored boxes that are similar to a user defined RGB or CMYK value The likeness of the colors in the set are dependent on the value entered in the RGB or CMYK Increment box Troubleshooting 323 To access a detailed Color Samples set from the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer then you can e View the information on the printer control panel home screen or in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP IP section 2 Click Configuration gt Color
272. nt of the original document is mostly text or line art e Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos e Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image 5 Touch 7 6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying e Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer e Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Copying 98 Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film e Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine e Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper e Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer 7 Touch ZS gt Copy It Collating copies If you print multiple copies of a document then you can choose to print each copy as a set collated or to print the copies as groups of pages not collated Collated Not collated 123 233
273. nter you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup In the Fax Name or Station Name field enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes In the Fax Number or Station Number field enter the printer fax number uu A WwW N Click Submit Setting the date and time You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send If there is a power failure then you may have to reset the date and time 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Security gt Set Date and Time 3 Inthe Set Date amp Time field enter the current date and time 4 Click Submit Note It is recommended to use the network time Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP
274. nts of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hung ria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower IIl 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information Regulatory notices for wireless products This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters for example but not limited to wireless network cards or proximity card readers Exposure to radio frequency radiation The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies A minimum separation of 20 cm 8 inches must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies Noti
275. nue jam cleared Clearing jams 266 24x paper jam Paper jam in Tray 1 1 Open Tray 1 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close Tray 1 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Paper jam in one of the optional trays 1 Open the specified tray 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 267 3 Close the tray 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 250 paper jam 1 Press the paper release lever and then remove any jammed pages from the multipurpose feeder Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed a P a a L A f A 2 Load new paper into the multipurpose feeder 3 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 29y xx paper jams 1 Remove all original documents from the Automatic Document Feeder ADF 2 Open the ADF cover firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 268 3 Close the ADF cover 4 Open the duplex cover firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 5 Open the
276. nvironment 220 Using Hibernate Mode Hibernate is an ultra low power operating mode When operating in Hibernate mode the printer is essentially off and all other systems and devices are powered down safely Note The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Sleep Button Settings 3 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop down menu select Hibernate 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings 2 Touch Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button 3 Touch Hibernate gt ZS Adjusting the brightness of the display To save energy or if you are have trouble reading your display adjust the brightness of the display Available settings range from 20 100 The factory default setting is 100 Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the home screen The IP address appears as four sets of nu
277. ny human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition Laser advisory label A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown Notices 329 DANGER Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated Avoid exposure to laser beam PERIGO Radia o a laser invis vel sera liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido Evite a exposi o aos feixes de laser Opasnost Nevidljivo lasersko zra enje kada su kasete uklonjene i poni tena sigurnosna veza Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima NEBEZPE Kdy jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokov na pojistka ze za zen je vys l no neviditeln laserov z en Nevystavujte se p soben laserov ho paprsku FARE Usynlig laserstr ling n r patroner fjernes og sp rreanordningen er sl et fra Undg at blive udsat for laserstr len GEVAAR Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser DANGER Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du d verrouillage des loquets Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser VAARA N kym t nt lasers teily on varottava kun v rikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki V lt lasers teelle altistumista GEFAHR Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre Laserstr
278. o not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup In the Fax Name or Station Name field enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes In the Fax Number or Station Number field enter the printer fax number mu A WW N Click Submit Choosing a fax connection Notes The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the telephone wall outlet Other devices such as a telephone or answering machine can be successfully attached to pass through the printer as described in the setup steps e If you want a digital connection such as ISDN DSL or ADSL then a third party device such as a DSL filter is required Contact your DSL provider for a DSL filter The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone line that can interfere with the ability of the printer to fax properly Faxing 113 e You do not need to attach the printer to a computer but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line to send and receive faxes Equipment and service options Fax connection setup Connect directly to the telephone line See Connecting to an analog telephone line on page 113 Connect to a Digital Subscriber Line DSL or ADSL service S
279. o verify that all printer options are installed correctly A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page If an option you installed is not listed then it is not installed correctly Remove the option and install it again e Network setup page If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration Printing a menu settings page From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Menu Settings Page Printing a network setup page If the printer is attached to a network then print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Network Setup Page 2 Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the status is Connected Ifthe statusisNot Connected then the LAN drop may not be active or the network cable may be malfunctioning Consult a system support person for a solution and then print another network setup page Loading paper and specialty media 59 Loading paper and specialty media The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print For more information see Avoiding jams on page 253 and Storing paper on
280. ob 277 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 278 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 278 38 Memory full 278 39 Complex page some data may not have printed 278 51 Defective flash detected 278 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 278 53 Unformatted flash detected 279 54 Network x software error 279 54 Serial option x error 279 54 Standard network software error 279 55 Unsupported option in slot x 279 550 sheet drawer installing 43 550 sheet specialty media drawer installing 43 550 sheet tray standard or optional loading 59 56 Parallel port x disabled 280 56 Serial port x disabled 280 56 Standard USB port disabled 280 56 USB port x disabled 280 57 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 280 58 Input config error 280 58 Too many disks installed 281 58 Too many flash options installed 281 58 Too many trays attached 281 59 Incompatible tray x 281 61 Remove defective disk 281 62 Disk full 282 63 Unformatted disk 282 80 xx Fuser life warning 282 80 xx Fuser missing 282 80 xx Fuser near life warning 282 80 xx Replace fuser 282 82 xx Replace waste toner bottle 282 82 xx Waste toner bottle missing 283 82 xx Waste toner bottle nearly full 283 83 xx Replace transfer module 283 83 xx Transfer module life warning 283 83 xx Transfer module missing 283 83 xx Transfer module near life warning 283 84 xx Color photoconductor low 284 84 xx color
281. ob if Collate is set to On If Collate is set to Off then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document Specify the paper source for separator sheets Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Print Settings Setup menu Use Printer Language PS Emulation PCL Emulation Job Waiting Print Area Normal Whole Page Printer Usage Max Yield Max Speed Black Only Mode 202 Set the default printer language Notes e PS Emulation is the factory default printer language PS emulation uses a PS interpreter for processing print jobs e PCL Emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print jobs e Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language Specify if print jobs are removed from the print queue when they require unavailable printer options or custom settings These print jobs are stored in a separate print queue so other jobs print normally When the missing information or options are obtaine
282. ode using 220 hiding icons on the home screen 20 home screen hiding icons 20 showing icons 20 home screen buttons and icons description 16 HTML menu 214 icons on the home screen hiding 20 showing 20 Image menu 215 importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 23 initial fax setup 112 using the Embedded Web Server 112 Install Tray x 273 installing on a wireless network using Windows 48 installing options order of installation 42 installing printer on wireless network 48 installing printer hard disk 37 installing printer on a network wired networking 52 installing printer on a wireless network using Macintosh 50 installing printer software 46 adding options 47 interior of the printer cleaning 228 internal print server troubleshooting 305 Internal Solutions Port changing port settings 55 installing 33 troubleshooting 305 IPv6 menu 150 J jams avoiding 253 locating jam areas 254 locations 254 343 numbers 254 jams clearing 200 201 paper jams 255 202 203 paper jams 260 24x paper jam 266 250 paper jam 26 7 290 294 229 29y xx paper jams 267 Job Accounting menu 208 L labels paper tips 91 letterhead copying on 94 loading 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder 69 tips on using 89 light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints 309 light indicator 14 linking trays 74 75 Load paper source with custom string 273 Load paper source with custom type name 273
283. ommis Cs f s7mmuss m Printer configurations CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters You can configure your basic printer by adding up to four 550 sheet optional drawers and a 2000 sheet high capacity feeder A caster base and a spacer are supported in any configurations Spacers are nonfunctional trays that can be used to add height to a printer stack Spacers must be e Placed directly on a caster base or table top e Placed at the bottom of all tray stacks and cannot be used with an optional 2000 sheet high capacity drawer For information on installing the spacers see the instruction sheet that came with the hardware Learning about the printer Automatic document feeder ADF ADF tray Standard bin Printer control panel Optional 550 sheet drawer Optional 2000 sheet high Capacity feeder Standard 550 sheet drawer Multipurpose feeder Optional 550 sheet drawer Note This drawer is standard on the X748dte model 12 Learning about the printer 13 Understanding the ADF and scanner glass Automatic Document F
284. ompatible tray x 281 61 Remove defective disk 281 62 Disk full 282 63 Unformatted disk 282 80 xx Fuser life warning 282 80 xx Fuser missing 282 80 xx Fuser near life warning 282 80 xx Replace fuser 282 82 xx Replace waste toner bottle 282 82 xx Waste toner bottle missing 283 82 xx Waste toner bottle nearly full 283 83 xx Replace transfer module 283 83 xx Transfer module life warning 283 83 xx Transfer module missing 283 83 xx Transfer module near life warning 283 84 color photoconductor low 246 84 color photoconductor nearly low 246 84 Replace color photoconductor 246 84 xx Color photoconductor low 284 84 xx color photoconductor missing 283 84 xx color photoconductor nearly low 283 84 xx Replace color photoconductor 284 840 01 Scanner disabled by admin 286 840 02 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists 286 88 Replace color cartridge 284 88 xx Color cartridge critically low 284 88 xx color cartridge low 284 285 88 xx color cartridge nearly low 285 Adjusting color 270 an error has occurred with the USB drive 270 Change paper source to custom string 271 Change paper source to custom type name 270 Change paper source to paper type paper size 271 Close front door 271 Close top access cover 271 Disk corrupted 271 Disk full scan job canceled 271 Disk near full Securely clearing disk space 272 Disk problem 272 Er
285. omplete but the wireless ISP will not be active In the event that the printer was configured for a wireless ISP while still attached to a wired connection disconnect the wired connection turn the printer off and then turn the printer back on again This will enable the wireless ISP e Only one network connection at a time is active If you want to switch the connection type between wired and wireless you must first turn the printer off connect the cable to switch to a wired connection or disconnect the cable to switch to a wireless connection and then turn the printer on For Windows users 1 Click ua or click Start and then click Run 2 Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type control printers 3 Press Enter or click OK The printer folder opens 4 Locate the printer that has changed Note If there is more than one copy of the printer then update all of them with the new IP address Right click the printer Click Properties gt Ports tab Select the port from the list and then click Configure Port ao nN OO OUI Type the new IP address in the Printer Name or IP Address field Note View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Reports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 9 Click OK gt Close For Macintosh users Add the printer e For IP printing Additional printer setup 56 In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the
286. on a different subnet than the printer 3 Install the printer drivers and then add the printer a Install a printer driver file on the computer 1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD and then double click the installer package for the printer Follow the instructions on the computer screen Select a destination and then click Continue From the Easy Install screen click Install U BW N Type the user password and then click OK All the necessary applications are installed in the computer 6 Click Close when installation is complete b Add the printer e For IP printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax 2 Click and then click the IP tab 3 Type the printer IP address in the address field and then click Add Additional printer setup 54 In Mac OS X version 10 4 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities 2 Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center 3 From the Printer List click Add and then click IP Printer 4 Type in the printer IP address in the address field and then click Add e For AppleTalk printing Note Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer In Mac OS X version 10 5 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax 2 Click and then navigate to AppleTalk gt select the printer from the list gt Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 1 From the Finder navigate to App
287. onductor of the color with the repeating defect if the defects occur in the following instances e Every 28 3 mm 1 11 in of the page e Every 72 4 mm 2 85 in of the page REPLACE THE FUSER Replace the fuser if print defects occur in the following instances e Every 47 4 mm 1 87 in of the page e Every 94 8 mm 3 73 in of the page e Every 113 mm 4 45 in of the page Shadow images appear on prints CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct paper type setting e For Windows users specify the paper type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the paper type from the Print dialog MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective photoconductor MAKE SURE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER 1 Remove the cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the cartridge Note If print quality does not improve then replace the cartridge Troubleshooting 315 CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT If the problem continues the printer may need to be
288. onductors 236 toner cartridges 235 transfer module 235 waste toner bottle 236 output file type changing 107 P paper characteristics 77 different sizes copying 96 letterhead 78 preprinted forms 78 recycled 79 217 saving 99 selecting 78 storing 80 unacceptable 78 79 Universal size setting 59 Paper changes needed 275 paper feed troubleshooting message remains after jam is cleared 306 Index paper jams avoiding 253 paper jams clearing 200 201 paper jams 255 202 203 paper jams 260 24x paper jam 266 250 paper jam 26 7 290 294 229 29y xx paper jams 267 Paper Loading menu 142 paper size setting 59 Universal 144 Paper Size Type menu 136 paper sizes supported 81 paper type setting 59 paper types supported by printer 83 where to load 83 Paper Weight menu 140 paper weights supported by printer 83 Parallel x menu 153 parts checking status 234 checking from printer control panel 234 checking using the Embedded Web Server 234 using genuine Lexmark 237 PCL Emul menu 212 PDF menu 211 photoconductor replacing 246 photoconductors ordering 236 photos copying 94 pick pad replacing 239 pick roller assembly replacing 239 placing separator sheets between copies 98 port settings configuring 55 PostScript menu 211 print job canceling from computer 92 print quality cleaning the ADF parts 229 cleaning the printhead lenses 232 cleaning the scanner glass 229 replacing photoconductors 246 print quality trou
289. onts macros and other data in printer memory e Install additional printer memory 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs Touch Continue to clear the message 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk Touch Continue to clear the message 38 Memory full Try one or more of the following Touch Cancel job to clear the message e Install additional printer memory 39 Complex page some data may not have printed Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Cancel the current print job e Install additional printer memory 51 Defective flash detected Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Cancel the current print job 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted e Delete fonts macros and other data stored in flash memory e Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card Troubleshooting 279 53 Unformatted flash detected Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to stop the defragment operat
290. or Balance provides the user with the ability to make subtle adjustments to the amount of toner being used in each color plane Selecting positive or negative values for cyan magenta yellow and black from the Color Balance menu will slightly increase or decrease the amount of toner used for the chosen color For example if a printed page has a red tint then decreasing both magenta and yellow could potentially improve the color balance My color transparencies seem dark when they are projected Is there anything can do to improve the color This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors To obtain the highest projected color quality transmissive overhead projectors are recommended If a reflective projector must be used then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1 2 or 3 willlighten the transparency Make sure to print on the recommended type of color transparencies What is manual color correction When manual color correction is enabled the printer employs user selected color conversion tables to process objects However Color Correction must be set to Manual or no user defined color conversion will be implemented Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed text graphics or images and how the color of the object is specified in the software program RGB or CMYK combinations Notes e Manual color correction is not useful if the soft
291. or no carbon required NCR paper e Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer e Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser e Preprinted papers that require a registration the precise print location on the page greater than 2 3 mm 0 9 in such as optical character recognition OCR forms In some cases registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms e Coated papers erasable bond synthetic papers thermal papers Rough edged rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers Recycled papers that fail EN12281 2002 European Paper weighing less than 60 g m 16 Ib e Multiple part forms or documents Selecting paper Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble free printing To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality e Always use new undamaged paper Before loading paper know the recommended printable side of the paper This information is usually indicated on the paper package Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Do not mix paper sizes types or weights in the same tray mixing results in jams Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead e Use grain long for 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24
292. ord field and then click Filter 3 Click Embedded Web Server to launch the document Maintaining the printer 228 Maintaining the printer Periodically certain tasks are required to maintain the optimum performance of your printer Warning Potential Damage Failure to replace parts and supplies when directed may cause damage to your printer or prevent the printer from performing optimally Cleaning the printer parts Cleaning the interior of the printer Note You may need to perform this task after every few months Warning Potential Damage Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer warranty 1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet An CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the interior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding 2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder 3 Remove any dust lint and pieces of paper around and from inside the printer using a soft brush or vacuum 4 Use a dry cloth to wipe away loose toner particles Warning Potential Damage To avoid overexposing the photoconductor unit or imaging unit do not the leave the door open for more than 10 minutes Cleaning the exterior of the printer 1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To
293. ore anything on top of individual paper packages Paper and specialty media guidelines 81 Supported paper sizes types and weights The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper input sources and the types of paper they support Duplex Scanner glass J Jf 1 2 3 4 Note To use a paper size that is unlisted configure a Universal Paper Size Supported paper sizes MELEN ADF envelope Paper size and Standard Optional Optional Multipurpose Optional WELEI dimension 550 sheet 550 sheet 2000 sheet feeder 550 sheet paper tray tray high capacity specialty feeder media drawer ee ae As y V V y V 148 x 210 mm 5 83 x 8 27 in 7 V y V 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 83 in anes y V V y v V 182 x 257 mm 7 17 x 10 1 in E y V V Vv v V V 215 9 x 279 4 mm 8 5 x 11 in A4 210 x 297 mm 8 27 x 11 7 in 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 K lt 1 2 3 4 K K 1 2 3 4 Legal vE Ji V V V V V 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in Executive J J i V 2 J 2 J 2 J 184 2 x 266 7 mm 7 25 x 10 5 in Oficio M xico J i J J 2 J 2 J 2 J 215 9 x 340 4 mm 8 5 x 13 4 in Folio WE V V Vy V v 215 9 x 330 2 mm 8 5 x 13 in 1 Source supports paper size with size sensing 1 2 3 4 WEEET K lt e P P P P P P w Ww w w w w w D P P P P P P Source supports paper size without size sensing 3 Paper size is supported if se
294. ormal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Preprinted Weight Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Colored Weight Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Light Weight Specify the relative weight of the paper loaded Light Heavy Weight Specify the relative weight of the paper loaded Heavy Rough Cotton Weight Specify the relative weight of the cotton paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Custom x Weight Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded Light Normal Notes Heavy e Normal is the factory default setting e The options appear only when the custom type is supported Understanding the printer menus 142 Paper Loading menu Card Stock Loading Duplex Off Recycled Loading Duplex Off Glossy Loading Duplex Off Heavy Glossy Loading Off Duplex Labels Loading Off Duplex Vinyl Labels Loading Off Duplex Bond Loading Duplex Off Letterhead Loading Duplex Off Preprinted Loading Duplex Off Colored Loading Duplex Off Light Loading Duplex Off Notes Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Card Stock as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Recycled as the paper t
295. oto Photo or Graphics e Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos e Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Faxing 122 Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other e Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer e Black White Laser Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer e Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer e Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film e Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine e Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper e Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Resolution This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax If you are faxing a photo a drawing with fine lines or a document with very small text then increase the Resolution setting This will increase the amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality
296. oto paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to FTP gt FTP gt type the FTP address gt Send It Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Press and then enter the FTP shortcut number 4 Touch Send It Scanning 127 Scanning to an FTP address using the address book 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to FTP gt FTP gt ii gt enter the name of recipient gt Browse shortcuts gt name of recipient gt Search Using the FTP options FTP This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination Note Addresses should be in dot notation form fo
297. ower then to completely stop product power consumption disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet Total energy usage It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode s energy usage European Community EC directives conformity This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC and 2006 95 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 Radio interference notice Warning This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements of EN5
298. patterns you may have to change the default setting There are two settings available FSK pattern 1 and DTMF pattern 2 The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns Contact your telecommunications company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use Cannot send or receive a fax These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure if applicable e Telephone e Handset e Answering machine Troubleshooting 296 CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK 1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack Listen for a dial tone If you do not hear a dial tone then plug a different telephone into the wall jack If you still do not hear a dial tone then plug a telephone into a different wall jack U A W N If you hear a dial tone then connect the printer to that wall jack REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST The fax modem is an analog device Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used e If you are using an ISDN telephone service then connect the printer to an analog telephone port an R interface port on an ISDN terminal a
299. pen Embedded Web Server 323 checking an unresponsive printer 270 checking an unresponsive scanner 293 contacting customer support 323 error reading USB drive 302 FAQ about color printing 320 fax and e mail functions are not set up 295 forgot My MFP password 302 Forms are not available or are not working 299 nothing happens when USB drive is inserted 302 printer cannot scan to selected destination 301 Scan to Network 300 solving basic printer problems 270 troubleshooting copy copier does not respond 290 partial document or photo copies 292 poor copy quality 290 Index poor scanned image quality 293 scanner unit does not close 290 troubleshooting display display is blank 286 display shows only diamonds 286 troubleshooting fax caller ID is not shown 295 can receive but not send faxes 297 can send but not receive faxes 297 cannot send or receive a fax 295 received fax has poor print quality 298 troubleshooting paper feed message remains after jam is cleared 306 troubleshooting print error reading flash drive 286 held jobs do not print 287 incorrect characters print 289 incorrect margins 308 jammed pages are not reprinted 306 job prints from wrong tray 289 job prints on wrong paper 289 jobs do not print 286 Large jobs do not collate 289 multiple language PDF files do not print 286 paper curl 309 paper frequently jams 306 print job takes longer than expected 288 printing slows down 288 tray linking does not work
300. per Source Tray x Manual Feeder Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x FTP bit Depth 8 bit 1 bit Base File Name Custom Job Scanning On 195 Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Notes e Best for content is the factory default setting 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large This menu applies to all scan functions Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Set the quality of a text or a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 50 is the factory default setting Provide a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to FTP job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes e On is the factory default setting e This menu applies to all scan functions Specify whether the transmission log prints Note Print log is the factory default setting Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Specify an output bin for F
301. per does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the width guide 67 Loading paper and specialty media 68 Warning Potential Damage Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage 7 Insert the tray 8 From the printer control panel verify the paper size and paper type setting for the tray based on the paper you loaded Note Return the secondary length guide to its original position when loading long papers such as legal letter and A4 Squeeze and slide the guide until it clicks into place Loading paper and specialty media Loading the 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each paper tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed 1 Pull the tray out 2 Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading 3 Unlock the length guide 69 Loading paper and specialty media 70 4 Push the length guide release latch to raise the length guide Slide the guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading and then lock the guide 5 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 6 Load the paper stack e Printable side faceup for one sided printing e Printable side
302. perform together for superior print quality We recommend that you use only genuine Lexmark parts and supplies to help extend the life of your product Lexmark s warranty does not cover damage caused by non Lexmark parts and supplies Storing supplies Choose a cool clean storage area for the printer supplies Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them Do not expose supplies to e Direct sunlight e Temperatures above 35 C 95 F e High humidity above 80 e Salty air e Corrosive gases e Heavy dust Replacing parts and supplies Replacing a toner cartridge 1 Open the printer top access cover and then open the front door Warning Potential Damage To avoid overexposing the photoconductors do not leave the front door open for more than 10 minutes Maintaining the printer 238 2 Pull the green tabs of the specified cartridge up and out to remove the cartridge from the printer 3 Unpack the replacement toner cartridge 4 Place the old cartridge in the recycling bag 5 Place the bag in the shipping box used for the replacement part 6 Shake the replacement cartridge front to back and side to side to redistribute the toner 7 Remove the red packing strip from the cartridge 8 Insert the cartridge into the printer Maintaining the printer 239 9 Close the front door and then close the printer top access cover Note When print becomes f
303. points Understanding the printer menus 160 Miscellaneous Security Settings menu Login Restrictions Login failures Failure time frame Lockout time Panel Login Timeout Remote Login Timeout Security Reset Jumper Access controls No Security No Effect Reset factory security defaults LDAP Certificate Verification Demand Try Allow Never Minimum PIN Length 1 16 e Access controls No Security Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control panel before all users are locked out Notes e Login failures specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are locked out Settings range from 1 10 attempts 3 attempts is the factory default setting Failure time frame specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out Settings range from 1 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting Lockout time specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit Settings range from 1 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting 1 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the home screen before automatically logging off the user Settings range from 1 900 seconds 30 seconds is the factory default setting Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface r
304. printer setup 37 Installing a printer hard disk A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board For more information see Accessing the system board on page 26 Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 2 Unpack the printer hard disk 3 Locate the appropriate holes on the system board where the posts of the plastic tee will be aligned Note If an optional ISP is currently installed then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP Additional printer setup 38 To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP a Using a flathead screwdriver loosen the screws b Remove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket and then remove the bracket c Install the printer hard disk onto the ISP 1 Hold the edges of the printed circuit board assembly and then align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the ISP 2
305. products programs or services except those expressly designated by the manufacturer are the user s responsibility For Lexmark technical support visit support lexmark com For information on supplies and downloads visit www lexmark com If you don t have access to the Internet you can contact Lexmark by mail Lexmark International Inc Bldg 004 2 CSC 740 New Circle Road NW Lexington KY 40550 USA 2011 Lexmark International Inc All rights reserved Notices 325 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer software and documentation developed exclusively at private expense Trademarks Lexmark Lexmark with diamond design MarkNet and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc registered in the United States and or other countries MarkTrack and PrintCryption are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett Packard Company PCL is Hewlett Packard Company s designation of a set of printer commands language and functions included in its printer products This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands
306. r portrait and top edge for landscape e Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Set the quality of aJPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality Notes e Best for content is the factory default setting e 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large e This menu applies to all scan functions Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Set the quality of a text or a photo image in relation to file size and quality Note 75 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Photo Default 5 90 Use Multi Page TIFF Scan Bit Depth 8 bit 1 bit Custom Job Scanning On Scan Preview On Background Removal 4to 4 Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast Best for content 0 5 199 T Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality Note 50 is the factory default setting Provide a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to FTP job either one TIFF file is created containing
307. r Station Name Fax Number or Station Number Enable Manual Fax Set the printer to fax manually only which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset On Notes e Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number Touch 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function Memory Use Define the allocation of non volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs Equal Notes Mostly sent All send e Equal is the factory default setting Equal splits the memory for sending and receiving fax jobs into equal amounts All receive Mostly receive Mostly sent specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs All send specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs All receive specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs Mostly receive specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs Cancel Faxes Specify whether or not the printer cancels fax jobs Allow Don t Allow Caller ID Specify the type of caller ID being used On Alternate Fax number masking Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number Off Note The number of characters masked is determined by the Digits to mask From left setting From right Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number 0 58 Understanding the printer menus 180 Fax Cover Page Configure the fax cover page Fax Cover
308. r example yyy yyy yyy Yvyy File Name This option lets you enter the file name of the scanned document Original Size This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents for FTP sending e Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting The FTP screen appears with the new setting displayed e When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes e When Original Size is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document Send As This option sets the output PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS for the scanned image e PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com e Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access e TIFF Creates multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG e JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs e XPS Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
309. r printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications To use these applications activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server For more information about accessing the Embedded Web Server see Accessing the Embedded Web Server on page 20 For detailed information about configuring and using the home screen applications visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Setting up Forms and Favorites Description The application helps you simplify and streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the home screen Note The printer must have permission to access the network folder FTP site or Web site where the bookmark is stored From the computer where the bookmark is stored use sharing security and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access For help see the documentation that came with your operating system 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF gt Forms and Favorites 3 Define the bookmarks and then customize the settings 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen and then navigate th
310. ray Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with custom string Try one or more of the following e Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type e From the printer control panel touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray e Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with paper size Try one or more of the following e Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type e From the printer control panel touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing e Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray Cancel the print job Troubleshooting 275 Load Manual Feeder with paper type paper size Try one or more of the following e Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type e From the printer control panel touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing e Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray Cancel the print job Memory full cannot print faxes There is not enough memory to print the fax job Touch Continue to clear the message without printing Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been restarted No analog phone line connected to modem fax
311. ray x Auto Size Match Manual Feeder Transparency Separators Separator Sheets Off Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Separator Sheet Source Tray x Manual Feeder Darkness 1 9 Number of Copies 1 999 Specify the paper size of the original document Notes e Letter is the US factory default setting e A4 is the international factory default setting Specify the paper source for copy jobs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Place a sheet of paper between transparencies Note On is the factory default setting Place a sheet of paper between pages copies or jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Specify the separator sheet source Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Specify the level of darkness for the copy job Note 5 is the factory default setting Specify the number of copies for the copy job Note 1 is the factory default setting 176 EK Understanding the printer menus Header Footer Location Off Date Time Page number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Overlay Confidential Copy Draft Urgent Custom Off Custom Overlay Allow priority copies Custom Job scanning On Allow Save as Shortcut Background Removal 4 to 4 Auto Center On Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue 177 Specify header and footer information and its location on the page
312. reen touch Status Supplies gt View Supplies Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server Note Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Device Status gt More Details Maintaining the printer 235 Ordering parts and supplies To order parts and supplies in the U S contact Lexmark at 1 800 539 6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area In other countries or regions visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com or contact the place where you purchased the printer Notes e Each gauge displays the estimated life left for the supply or part For more information see Supplies menu on page 134 e All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter or A4 size plain paper e The printer is designed to send a low message to signal when a replacement supply item needs to be purchased and then a replace message when the new supply item except the waste toner bottle should be installed e The printer displays a near full message when a new waste toner bottle needs to be purchased e Th
313. rify that you are using the correct printer software e If the printer is connected to your computer through a USB port then make sure you are running a supported operating system and using a compatible printer software MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS WORKING PROPERLY e Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network e Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected If the status is Not Connected then check the network cables and then try printing the network setup page again Contact your system support person to make sure the network is functioning correctly The printer software is available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com MMIAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED USB SERIAL OR ETHERNET CABLE For more information visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer Confidential and other held jobs do not print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following PARTIAL JOB NO JOB OR BLANK PAGE PRINTS The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data e Delete the print job and then print it again e For PDF documents recreate the PDF and then print it again Trouble
314. rint from the selected tray e Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then touch Paper loaded continue e Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays Note This applies only to printers with tray linking capability Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Close front door Close the front door of the printer Close top access cover Close the printer top access cover to clear the message Disk corrupted The printer attempted to recover data on a corrupted hard disk The printer hard disk cannot be repaired From the home screen touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message Note Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk Disk full scan job canceled Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue scanning e Delete fonts macros and other data stored in the printer hard disk Install a hard disk with higher capacity Troubleshooting 272 Disk near full Securely clearing disk space Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing e Delete fonts macros and other data stored on the printer hard disk e Install a hard disk with higher capacity Disk problem The printer hard disk must be reformatted Touch Format disk to refor
315. rint job if Collate is set to On If Collate is set to Off then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s e Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs e Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document Specify the paper source for separator sheets Note Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Paper Saver Off 2 Up 3 Up 4 Up 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Paper Saver Ordering Horizontal Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Vertical Paper Saver Orientation Auto Landscape Portrait Paper Saver Border None Solid Quality menu 205 Specify that multiple page images be printed on one side of a paper Notes e Off is the factory default setting e The number selected is the number of page images that prints per side Specify the positioning of multiple page images Notes e Horizontal is the factory default setting e Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation Specify the orientation of a multiple page document Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer chooses between portrait and landscape Print a border on each page image Note None is the factory default setting Qualit
316. rinter DrODICMNS iuiar a a a a a 270 Understanding printer messages monuesniiniiii t a E E O T E T 270 SOVNE PANNE DODIES inaa a a 286 SOIVINE CODY PrODISIS currianu e a a a 290 SOIVING scanner ProDIEM Soei e EETA EE OE E 293 SOIVINE faX problem Sarnane a a a a a e a a 295 Solving home Screen applications problems xuisiessc cacsatwaivaciecaued shat barseaadaersadaciidovciealasatealiadesreeseus 298 SOVNE ODEON lOO Cl S srine e a 303 S lViNe paper reed ProblemMS sscsirur ie e E E R E E E 306 SOIVINE phintaualty Proble ITS uisi a a T a T T E E E eee 307 SOIVING color guall PRODI IG cercaan cated ans E a N 320 Embedded Web Server GOES NotOpENsucninieki noma e a a as ects 323 CONTACH NE CUSTOMER SUDDO Tenens en Goacsiuisduastehecadan atau a a duns doeenua A 323 Contents 6 NO GIGS Sisccacassoancacaanereseasanac reonsaiaaeusasuaduswaaanssanenuaguereseeenis sanmeasseretenesseiesaoner Ss 2 Podu ENN gy Ke a a ave Hd p RMMRmee te a OP OOS art Ta a CCI at ane oe 324 ET U1 OA C Oian arent aceon a a a a ates E eee save seatnsuse once 324 POWEV COMS UIT DEO Mis cse seis cee E E a a te aecd see aiuueh suGene Sue vena eae ae eaten eee 329 MOCK oerion tasers ewnile aonwiensiieaeneeaesandasieesenieteeieaveso aU Safety information 7 Safety information Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations CAUTION POTENTI
317. rives may be disabled on the device Contact your system support person for more information forgot the password to My MFP If you forget the password for your My MFP profile then you must delete the profile from your USB drive insert the drive into an MFP and then run the setup wizard again To manually delete the My MFP profile from your USB drive 1 Insert your USB drive into a computer 2 Locatethe mymfp preferences file as well as any other files beginning with mymfp they will be grouped together 3 Delete all files beginning with mymfp Troubleshooting 303 Solving option problems Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed Try one or more of the following RESET THE PRINTER Turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER 1 Turn the printer off using the power switch 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and then from the printer 3 Check the connection between the option and the printer MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list If the option is not listed then reinstall it For more information see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option or go to www lexmark com to view the option instruction sheet IMIAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED From the computer you are printing f
318. rk adapter or the printer in the area shown while actively printing A loss of data or a malfunction can occur 45 Additional printer setup 3 Close the access door and then neatly align the cable to the left Note You may choose to completely remove the access door and store it Setting up the printer software Installing the printer software Note If you installed the printer software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software then uninstall the current software first For Windows users 1 Close all open software programs 2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD If the installation dialog screen does not appear after a minute then launch the CD manually a Click B or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type D setup exe where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive c Press Enter or click OK 3 Click Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen For Macintosh users 1 Close all open applications 2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD If the installation dialog does not appear after a minute then click the CD icon on the desktop Additional printer setup 47 3 Double click the software installer package and then follow the instructions on the computer screen Note To take advantage of the full features of your printer select the custom install option and then select all packages listed Using the Internet 1 Go to the
319. rm to sound when the printer requires operator Alarm Control intervention Cartridge Alarm For each alarm type select from the following options Off Single Continuous Notes e Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control Single sounds three quick beeps Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm Off means no alarm will sound Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds Timeouts Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer Standby Mode enters a lower power state Disabled Note 15 is the factory default setting 1 240 Timeouts Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits after a job is Sleep Mode printed before it goes into a reduced power state 1 180 Notes e 30 is the factory default setting e Lower settings conserve more energy but may require longer warm up times Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting or you notice lights flickering in the room Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use Under most circumstances this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm up time Timeouts Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before Screen Timeout returning the printer display to a Ready state 15 300 Note 30 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Timeouts Print Timeout Disabled 1 255 Timeouts Wait Timeout Disabled 15 65535 Timeouts Job Hold
320. rnate Message text entry Notes e No is the factory default setting for Activate e Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to Display Home screen customization Add or remove icons and buttons that appear on the home screen Change Language For each icon or button select from the following options Copy Display Copy Shortcuts Do Not Display Fax Fax Shortcuts E mail E mail Shortcuts FTP FTP Shortcuts Search Held Jobs Held Jobs USB Drive Profiles and Solutions Bookmarks Jobs by user Forms and Favorites Date Format Format the printer date MM DD YYYY DD MM YYYY YYYY MM DD Time Format Format the printer time 12 hour A M P M 24 hour clock Screen Brightness Specify the brightness of the printer control panel screen 20 100 Understanding the printer menus Output Lighting Standard Bin LED Normal Standby Mode Bright Dim Off Power Saver Bright Dim Audio Feedback Button Feedback Volume 1 10 Scanner Jam Recovery Job level Page level Web Page Refresh Rate 30 300 171 Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time Note Off is the factory default setting Set the amount of light you want from the standard bin or an optional output bin Notes In Normal Standby Mode the factory default setting is Bright e In Power Saver Mode the factory default setting is Dim e This menu item appears only when an integrated output light is present
321. rom select the option For more information see Updating available options in the printer driver on page 47 Paper tray problems Try one or more of the following M AKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY 1 Open the paper tray 2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds 3 Make sure the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper 4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly RESET THE PRINTER Turn the printer off wait about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on Troubleshooting 304 IMIAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray then it may not be properly installed Reinstall the paper tray For more information see the hardware setup documentation that came with the paper tray or go to http support lexmark com to view the paper tray instruction sheet 2 000 sheet drawer problems CHECK THE DRAWER CONNECTION Make sure the 2 000 sheet drawer is properly connected to the printer LOAD PAPER If the tray is empty then load paper in the tray or feeder CLEAR ANY JAMS Open the tray or feeder and then remove any jammed paper AVOID PAPER JAMS e Flex the paper e Make sure the drawer is properly installed e Make sure paper is loaded correctly e Make sure the paper stack you load does not exceed the maximum fill line indicated in the tray e Make sure the paper or specialty media meets specificat
322. rom the list of publications click the Networking Guide link e Installing the printer using Guided or Advanced wireless setup e Connecting the printer to an Ethernet or a wireless network e Troubleshooting printer connection problems Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help Opena printer software program or application and then click Help Click 2 to view context sensitive information Notes e Help is automatically installed with the printer software The printer software is located in the printer program folder or on the desktop depending on your operating system Learning about the printer 10 What are you looking for Find it here Latest supplemental information updates and customer Lexmark Support Web site support http support lexmark com Documentation Note Select your country or region and then select Driver downoad your product to view the appropriate support site Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country or region can be found on the Support Web site or on the printed warranty that came with your Voice support printer Live chat support E mail support Record the following information located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer and have it ready when you contact customer support so that they may serve you faster e Machine Type number e Serial number e Date purchased e Store where purchased Warranty information Warranty
323. ror reading USB drive Remove USB 272 Fax memory full 272 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 272 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 272 Fax Station Name not setup 272 Fax Station Number not set up 273 Insert Tray x 273 Install Tray x 273 Load paper source with custom string 273 346 Load paper source with custom type name 273 Load paper source with paper size 274 Load paper source with paper type paper size 274 Load Manual Feeder with custom string 274 Load Manual Feeder with custom type name 274 Load Manual Feeder with paper size 274 Load Manual Feeder with paper type paper size 275 Memory full cannot print faxes 275 No analog phone line connected to modem fax is disabled 275 Paper changes needed 275 Remove packaging material area name 275 Remove paper from standard output bin 275 Replace separator pad 275 Restore held jobs 275 Scan Document Too Long 276 Scanner ADF Cover Open 276 SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator 276 Some held jobs were not restored 276 Supply needed to complete job 276 Tray x paper size unsupported 276 Unsupported disk 276 Weblink server not set up Contact system administrator 276 printer options troubleshooting 2 000 sheet drawer problems 304 cannot detect flash memory card 304 cannot detect printer hard disk 304 internal print server 305 Intern
324. rough form categories or search for forms based on a form number name or description Setting up Scan to Network Description The application lets you capture a digital image of a hard copy document and route it to a shared network folder You can define up to 30 unique folder destinations Notes e The printer must have permission to write to the destinations From the computer where the destination is specified use sharing security and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a write access For help see the documentation that came with your operating system e The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined Setting up and using the home screen applications 22 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF gt Scan to Network 3 Specify the destinations and then customize the settings 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen and then follow the instructions on the printer display Setting up My MFP Description The application lets you customize your touch screen settings and store those preferences in a flash drive Each time you want to copy fax or scan insert th
325. rver 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Scanning 126 2 Click Settings 3 Under Other Settings click Manage Shortcuts Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password get one from your system support person 4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup 5 Enter the appropriate information 6 Enter a shortcut number If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 7 Click Add Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen 1 From the home screen navigate to O FTP gt type the FTP address gt Sax gt enter a name for the shortcut gt Done 2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK If the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 3 Touch Submit Scanning to an FTP address Scanning to an FTP address using the printer control panel 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies ph
326. s photoconductors 246 waster toner bottle 245 reports viewing 251 Reports menu 145 148 reserve print jobs 88 printing from a Macintosh computer 88 printing from Windows 88 resolution fax changing 119 Restore held jobs 275 restoring factory default settings 221 S safety information 7 8 saving paper 99 Scan Document Too Long 276 scan screen advanced options 132 options 131 scan to computer options 131 132 original size 131 paper orientation setting 132 Scan to Network setting up 21 using 125 scan troubleshooting cannot scan from a computer 294 partial document or photo scans 294 scan was not successful 293 scanner unit does not close 290 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 293 347 ScanBack Utility using 130 scanner Automatic Document Feeder ADF 13 scanner glass 13 Scanner ADF Cover Open 276 scanner glass cleaning 229 scanner glass flatbed copying using 94 scanning from a flash drive 130 quick copy 93 to acomputer 129 to an FTP address 126 to an FTP using address book 127 scanning to acomputer 129 scanning to a flash drive 130 scanning to an FTP address creating shortcuts using the computer 125 using shortcut numbers 126 using the address book 127 using the printer control panel 126 scanning to network destinations 125 Security Audit Log menu 163 security lock 223 security Web page where to find 227 selecting a location for the printer 10 selecting paper 78 sending a fax 118
327. s attempts to bring the scanner back online 1565 Emulation error load emulation option The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds and then disables the download emulator on the firmware card Solving printing problems Multiple language PDF files do not print The PDF files may contain unavailable fonts 1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat 2 Click the printer icon gt Advanced gt Print as image gt OK gt OK Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds The printer self test failed Turn the printer off wait about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on If Ready does not appear then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support Error message about reading USB drive appears Make sure the flash drive is supported Print jobs do not print Try one or more of the following IMIAKE SURE THERE IS NO PROBLEM WITH YOUR PRINTER From the printer control panel check the status If necessary follow the recovery instructions MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT Make sure Ready appears on the display before sending a print job Troubleshooting 287 CHECK IF A SUPPLY IS MISSING OR NEEDS REPLACEMENT Remove and then reinstall or replace the supply CHECK IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL Remove the paper stack from the standard exit bin CHECK IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY Load paper in the tray MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED e Ve
328. s such as pie charts bar charts and animations e Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos e Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other e Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer e Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film e Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine e Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper Copying 103 e Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Color This option enables or disables color for the scanned image Advanced Options Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings e Advanced Duplex Use to specify the document orientation whether documents are one sided or two sided and how documents are bound Note Some Advanced Duplex options are available only on select printers e Advanced Imaging Use to change or adjust Auto Center Background Removal Color Balance
329. sending a fax using shortcuts 118 sending a fax using the printer control panel 117 sending an e mail using the printer control panel 106 sending fax using shortcuts 118 using the address book 119 sending fax at a scheduled time 120 sending fax using the address book 119 separator pad ordering 236 replacing 239 Serial x menu 155 Index serial printing setting up 56 Set Date Time menu 165 setting TCP IP address 148 setting the fax number or station number 115 setting the outgoing fax name or Station name 115 setting the paper size 59 setting the paper type 59 setting the Universal paper size 59 setting up e mail alerts using the Embedded Web Server 251 setting up fax and e mail functions 295 setting up serial printing 56 setting up the printer on a wired network Macintosh 52 on a wired network Windows 52 Setup menu 202 shipping the printer 250 shortcuts creating e mail 105 fax destination 117 FTP address 126 FTP destination 125 showing icons on the home screen 20 Sleep Mode adjusting 219 SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator 276 SMTP Setup menu 158 Some held jobs were not restored 276 Standard Network menu 146 standard tray loading 59 Standard USB menu 152 statement of volatility 223 status of parts checking 234 status of supplies checking 234 storing paper 80 supplies 237 storing print jobs 88 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 317 streaks appear on a page 3
330. serviced Skewed print Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Adjust the length and width guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded e Make sure the guides are not too far from the paper stack e Make sure the guides are not pressing too lightly against the paper stack CHECK THE PAPER Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS CLEAN OR IS NOT CONTAMINATED WITH PAPER DUST Clean the exterior of the printer 1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet Warning Potential Damage To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding 2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin 3 Dampen a clean lint free cloth with water Warning Potential Damage Do not use household cleaners or detergents as they may damage the finish of the printer 4 Wipe only the exterior of the printer making sure to include the standard exit bin Warning Potential Damage Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer 5 Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job MAKE SURE THE PAPER FEED ROLLERS ARE CLEAN AND ARE NOT CONTAMINATED WITH DUST 1 Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from
331. setting This setting supports the performance specifications for your printer On configures the printer to produce as little noise as possible This setting is best suited for printing text and line art For optimal printing of color rich documents set Quiet Mode to Off Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing Run the setup wizard Notes e Yes is the factory default setting e After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the Country select screen the default becomes No Understanding the printer menus 168 Keyboard Specify a language and custom key information for the printer Keyboard Type keyboard The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and English symbols from the keyboard Francais Francais Canadien Deutsch Italiano Espanol Greek Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Suomi Portuguese Russian Polski Swiss German Swiss French Turkce Korean Custom Key x Accents Symbols Tab On Russian Polish Tab On Korean Tab Paper Sizes Specify the default paper measurement US Metric Notes e Initial setting is determined by your country or region selection in the initial setup wizard e Changing this setting also changes the default for each input source in the Paper Size Paper Type menu Scan to PC Port Range Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking port range firewall
332. shooting 288 If you are printing from the Internet then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one e For Windows users open Print Properties From the Print and Hold dialog select the Keep duplicate documents check box under the User name text box before entering a PIN number e For Macintosh users save each print job naming each job differently and then send the individual jobs to the printer MMIAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them Print job takes longer than expected Try one or more of the following REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB Eliminate the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the print job TURN OFF THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Print Recovery gt Page Protect gt Off gt ZS CHANGE THE ENVIRONMENTAL SETTINGS When using Eco Mode or Quiet Mode settings you may notice a reduction in performance Printing slows down Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE TO USE PAPER NOT NARROW ENOUGH TO INVOKE THE SLOWDOWN MODE Place larger paper such as Letter and A4 in the tray and then print the same file Note The slowdown mode functions as designed This is to protect the fuser from becoming dama
333. sion log after each fax job Print log Do not print log Print only for error Receive Error Log Enable printing of a receive error log following a receive error Print Never Print on Error Auto Print Logs Enable automatic printing of fax logs Note Logs print after every 200 fax jobs Understanding the printer menus Log Paper Source Tray x Manual Feeder Logs Display Remote Fax Name or Remote Station Name Dialed Number Enable Job Log Speaker Mode On until Connected Always On Always Off Speaker Volume High Ringer Volume Answer On All Rings Single Ring Only Double Ring Only Triple Ring Only Single or Double Rings Only Single or Triple Rings Only Double or Triple Rings Only 186 Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name returned Enable access to the Fax Job log Enable access to the Fax Call log Specify the mode of the speaker Notes e On until Connected is the factory default setting A sound is issued until the fax connection is made e Always On turns the speaker on e Always Off turns the speaker off Control the volume setting Note High is the factory default setting Control the fax speaker ringer volume Note On is the factory default setting Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls Note All Rings is the factory default setting Un
334. sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia smernice 1999 5 ES relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 ES H rmed intygar Lexmark International Inc att denna produkt st r i verensst mmelse med de v sentliga Lexmark International Inc izjavlja da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG Statement of Limited Warranty Lexmark X746x X748x Notices 338 Lexmark International Inc Lexington KY This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada For customers outside the U S refer to the country specific warranty information that came with your product This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use and not for resale from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer referred to in this statement as Remarketer Limited warranty Lexmark warrants that this product lIs manufactured from new parts or new and serviceable used parts which perform like new parts ls during normal use free from defects in material and workmanship If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement at Lexmark s option If this product is a feature or option this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended To obtain w
335. system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board For more information see Accessing the system board on page 26 Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 2 Unpack the ISP kit Additional printer setup 34 3 Locate the appropriate holes on the system board where the posts of the plastic tee will be aligned Note If an optional printer hard disk is currently installed then remove it first For more information see Removing a printer hard disk on page 41 4 Remove the screws and then remove the metal cover from the ISP opening Additional printer setup 35 5 Attach the ISP solution to the system board a Align the posts of the plastic tee to the holes on the system board b Hold the edges of the ISP and guide it to the opening on the system board cage and then gently allow it to rest on the plastic tee Additional printer setup 36 6 Connect the ISP solution interface cable into the color coded receptacle on the system board 7 Firmly connect the ISP solution to the system board cage using the two screws C 8 Reattach the system board cover Note If you have removed an optional printer hard disk while installing the Internal Solutions Port then reinstall the printer hard disk first before reattaching the system board cover For more information see Installing a printer hard disk on page 37 Additional
336. t Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast Specify the contrast used for the copy job 0 5 Note Best for content is the factory default setting Best for content Mirror Image Create a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting On Negative Image Create a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting On Shadow Detail Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy 4 to 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting Scan edge to edge Specify if the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting On Sharpness Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature Enable the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer 4 to 4 output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Sample Copy Create a sample copy of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting On Fax Settings menu Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line Understanding the printer menus 179 General Fax Settings Use To Fax Name or Station Name Specify the name of the fax in the printer Fax Number or Station Number Specify the number assigned to the fax Station ID Specify how the fax is identified Fax Name o
337. t Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Reverse Portrait Reverse Landscape Help menu The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer MFP as PDF files They contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks including copying scanning and faxing English French German and Spanish translations are stored in the printer Other translations are available on the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Menu item Description Print All Guides Prints all the guides Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and changing settings Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers shortcut numbers or the address book and about changing settings E mail Guide Provides information about sending e mails using addresses shortcut numbers or the address book and about changing settings FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an FTP address shortcut numbers or the address book and about changing settings Print Defects Guide Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information Supplies Guide Provides part numbers for ordering supplies Saving money and the environment 217 Saving money and the environment Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its pr
338. t Properties e For Macintosh users select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop up menus MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN DEFECTIVE OR EMPTY TONER CARTRIDGE Replace the worn defective or empty toner cartridge CLEAR THE PAPER PATH AROUND THE TONER CARTRIDGE Check the paper path around the toner cartridge CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching Clear any paper you see MAKE SURE THERE IS NO TONER IN THE PAPER PATH Toner fog or background shading appears on the page Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THE TONER CARTRIDGE IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY OR IS NOT DEFECTIVE Reinstall or replace the defective toner cartridge MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the worn or defective transfer module MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the word or defective photoconductor unit 318 Troubleshooting 319 IMIAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the worn or defective fuser MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS RECALIBRATED RECENTLY Perform color adjust from the Quality menu MAKE SURE THE APPLICATION HAS NOT SPECIFIED AN OFF WHITE BACKGROUND Check the application settings IMIAKE SURE NO TONER IS IN THE PAPER PATH Contact customer support Toner rubs off Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT
339. t setting The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks e On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages e Offsets the printer to never reprint jammed pages Print a page that may not have printed otherwise Notes e Off is the factory default setting Off prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page e On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints Understanding the printer menus 174 Press Sleep Button Determine how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep Sleep button when the printer is idle Hibernate Notes Do Nothin Sleep is the factory default setting Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower power configuration If the printer is in Sleep Mode then the touch screen appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button on the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode If the printer is in Hibernate mode then the touch screen is completely off and the Sleep button turns amber in color and is blinking Press and Hold Sleep Button Determine how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep Do Nothing button when the printer is idle Sleep Notes Hibernate oe Do Nothing is the factory default setting Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower power configuration If the printer
340. t the entire life of a device from design to end of life This is due to the energy intensive manufacturing processes required to make paper Thus Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper Using recycled paper is one way Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another Lexmark is well equipped to help customers minimize printing and copying waste In addition the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers although a converter s product list for special applications is maintained However the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing 1 Minimize paper consumption 2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry Stewardship Council FSC or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification PEFC These certifications guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and socially responsible forest management and restoration practices 3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs normal 75 or 80 g m certified paper lower weight paper or recycled paper Paper and specialty media guidelines 80 Unacceptable paper examples Test results indicate that the following paper types are
341. t to US 4 Paper size is supported if set to metric gt Paper size is supported if its length is between 8 27 in 210 mm and 14 in 355 6 mm and its width is between 5 5 in 139 7 mm and 8 5 in 215 9 mm 6 This size setting formats the envelope for 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in unless the size is specified by the software program 7 Turn Size Sensing off to support universal sizes that are close to standard paper or specialty media sizes Paper and specialty media guidelines 82 Paper size and dimension Standard Optional Optional Multipurpose Optional 550 sheet 550 sheet 2000 sheet feeder 550 sheet Statement 139 7 x 215 9 mm 5 5 x 8 5 in Universal 148 x 210 mm to 215 9 x 355 6 mm 5 83 x 8 27 in to 8 5 x 14 in Universal 76 2 xX 127 mm 3 x 5 in to 215 9 x 1219 2 mm 8 5 x 48 in 7 3 4 Envelope Monarch 98 4 x 190 5 mm 3 875 x 7 5 in 9 Envelope 98 4 x 226 1 mm 3 875 x 8 9 in Com 10 Envelope 104 8 x 241 3 mm 4 12 x 9 5 in DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm 4 33 x 8 66 in C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm 6 38 x 9 01 in B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 in Other Envelope 85 7 x 165 mm to 215 9 x 355 6 mm 3 375 x 6 50 in to 8 5 x 14 in tray tray high capacity specialty feeder media drawer Manual ADF Scanner envelope glass S 1 Source supports paper size with size sensing 2 Source supports pap
342. te Syslog Yes No Remote Syslog Server 256 character string Remote Syslog Port 1 65535 Remote Syslog Method Normal UDP Stunnel Remote Syslog Facility 0 23 Log full behavior Wrap over oldest entries E mail log then delete all entries Admin s e mail address 256 character string Digitally sign exports Off On Severity of events to log 0 7 Remote Syslog non logged events No Yes E mail log cleared alert No Yes E mail log wrapped alert No Yes E mail full alert No Yes full alert level 1 99 E mail log exported alert No Yes E mail log settings changed alert No Yes Log line endings LF n CR r CRLF r n factory default setting Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server No is the factory default setting Remote Syslog Server determines the value used to send logs to the remote syslog server 4 is the factory default setting Remote Syslog Port identifies the port over which the printer transmits logged events to a remote server Remote Syslog Method identifies the protocol used by the printer to transmit logged events to a remote server Normal UDP is the factory default setting Remote Syslog Facility determines the Facility value that the printer uses when sending events to the remote syslog server 4 is the factory default setting Log full behavior determines how the printer resolves if the log entirely fills its allotted memory
343. ter off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Install the printer and any optional drawers in the following order Optional 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder e Optional 550 sheet drawer e Optional 550 sheet specialty media drawer Printer For information on installing an optional drawer see the setup documentation that came with the option Warning Potential Damage The trays in the optional 550 sheet drawer and the optional 550 sheet specialty media drawer are not interchangeable Additional printer setup 43 Installing optional drawers A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer A CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more t
344. terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks Avis r serv aux utilisateurs du r seau t l phonique du Canada Ce produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industrie Canada Le num ro REN ringer equivalence number num ro d quivalence de sonnerie fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant tre connect s a l interface t l phonique En bout de ligne le nombre d appareils qui peuvent tre connect s n est p
345. tes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1 K increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer control panel The menu selection is then updated Understanding the printer menus Job Buffering Mac Binary PS ENA Address YYY YYY YYY YYY ENA Netmask YYY YYY YYY YYY ENA Gateway YYY YYY YYY YYY Parallel x menu 153 Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing Notes Off is the factory default setting On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Notes e Auto is the factory default setting On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs e Off filters print jobs using the standard
346. the print cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the print cartridge If the problem continues the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact Customer Support Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Try one or more of the following SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER e From the printer control panel Paper Menu select Default Source e For Windows users select the paper source from Print Properties e For Macintosh users select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop up menus MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN DEFECTIVE OR EMPTY TONER CARTRIDGE Replace the worn defective or empty toner cartridge CLEAR THE PAPER PATH AROUND THE TONER CARTRIDGE A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching Clear any paper you see or clean any visible toner from the paper path If the problem persists then contact Customer Support Troubleshooting Streaked vertical lines appear on prints hs Try one or more of the following SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER e From the printer control panel Paper menu select Default Source e For Windows users select the paper source from Prin
347. the wall outlet 2 Remove the paper feed rollers Note For instructions on how to remove and reinstall the paper feed rollers see the setup sheet that came with the rollers inside the compartment box of Tray 1 3 Dampen a clean lint free cloth with water Troubleshooting 316 4 Clean the paper feed rollers Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the rubber Doing so will damage the rollers 5 Reinstall the paper feed rollers Note Make sure to replace the worn or defective paper feed rollers Solid color pages DS MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR IS NOT DEFECTIVE AND IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY Remove and then reinstall the photoconductor If the problem continues then the photoconductor may need to be replaced Black or white streaks appear on transparencies or paper IN A S BC DHF DEF Try one or more of the following ENSURE THAT THE FILL PATTERN IS CORRECT If the fill pattern is incorrect choose a different fill pattern from your software program CHECK THE PAPER TYPE e Use only the recommended transparencies Ensure that the Paper Type setting matches what is loaded in the tray or feeder e Ensure that the Paper Texture setting is correct for the type of paper or specialty media loaded in the tray or feeder Troubleshooting 317 MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER When 88 xx color cartridge low appears make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print cartridge 1 Remove
348. these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient s gt ia gt enter the name of recipient gt Browse shortcuts E mailing 107 4 Touch the name of the recipients To enter additional recipients touch Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add or search the address book 5 Touch Done Customizing e mail settings Adding e mail subject and message information 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides From the home screen touch E mail Type an e mail address Touch Options gt Subject Type the e mail subject Touch Done gt Message Type an e mail message O oO N DD U A W N Touch Done gt E mail It Changing the output file type 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust th
349. tion sheet that came with the replacement part 3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Troubleshooting 284 84 xx Color photoconductor low 1 Order a replacement photoconductor immediately 2 When print quality is reduced install the new photoconductor following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement supply Notes e All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time e Make sure to reset the maintenance counter after replacing the photoconductors for optimum print quality 3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 84 xx Replace color photoconductor 1 Replace the photoconductor following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement supply Notes e All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time e Make sure to reset the maintenance counter after replacing the photoconductors for optimum print quality 2 From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 88 Replace color cartridge The specified print or toner cartridge is empty 1 Replace the specified cartridge For instructions on replacing cartridge from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 88 xx Color cartridge critically low The specified print cartridge is critically low 1 For instructions on replacing a print cartridge from the printer control panel to
350. to cancel and then touch Delete Selected Jobs Canceling a print job from the computer For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder a Click ote or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run dialog type control printers c Press Enter or click OK 2 Double click the printer icon 3 Select the print job you want to cancel 4 From the keyboard press Delete For Macintosh users In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu choose System Preferences gt Print amp Fax gt Open Print Queue 2 From the printer window select the print job you want to cancel 3 From the icon bar at the top of the window click the Delete icon In Mac OS X version 10 4 1 From the Finder navigate to Go gt Applications gt Utilities 2 Double click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility 3 Double click the printer icon 4 From the printer window select the print job you want to cancel 5 From the icon bar at the top of the window click Delete Copying 93 Copying Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Making copies Making a quick copy 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e When loading a document into the ADF adjust the paper g
351. to the printer 82 xx Waste toner bottle nearly full Order a replacement waste toner bottle immediately 1 Replace the waste toner bottle For instructions on installing the waste toner bottle from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 83 xx Replace transfer module Replace the transfer module following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 83 xx Transfer module life warning 1 Replace the transfer module following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 83 xx Transfer module missing Insert the transfer module into the printer 83 xx Transfer module near life warning 1 Order a replacement transfer module immediately 2 From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 3 When print quality is reduced install the new transfer module For instructions on installing the transfer module see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part or touch More Information on the printer home screen 84 xx color photoconductor missing Install the specified color photoconductor following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 84 xx color photoconductor nearly low 1 Order a replacement photoconductor 2 When print quality is reduced install the new photoconductor following the instruc
352. ts of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup gt Holding Faxes 3 From the Held Fax Mode menu select one of the following Off e Always On e Manual Scheduled Faxing 124 4 Ifyou selected Scheduled then continue with the following steps a Click Fax Holding Schedule b From the Action menu select Hold faxes c From the Time menu select the time you want the held faxes released d From the Day s menu select the day you want the held faxes released 5 Click Add Forwarding a fax This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number e mail address FTP site or LDSS 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings 3 From the Fax Forwarding menu select one of the following e Print e Print and Forward e Forward 4 From the Forward to menu select one of the following e Fax E mail e FTP e LDSS eSF 5 In the Forward to Shortcut field enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded
353. tting It prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page e Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page Understanding the printer menus PCL Emulation Settings Lines per Page 1 255 PCL Emulation Settings A4 Width 198 mm 203 mm PCL Emulation Settings Auto CR after LF PCL Emulation Settings Auto LF after CR Tray Renumber Assign MP Feeder Off None 0 199 Assign Tray x Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Paper Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Envelope Off None 0 199 213 Specify the number of lines that print on each page Notes e 60 is the US factory default setting 64 is the international default setting e The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page Paper Size and Orientation settings Select the paper size and orientation before setting Lines per Page Set the printer to print on A4 size paper Notes e 198 mm is the factory default setting e The 203 mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of eighty 10 pitch characters Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return CR after a line feed LF control command Note Off is the factory default setting Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed LF after a carriage return CR control command Note Off is the factory default setting Configure the printer to work with printer software or progr
354. ttings gt General Settings gt Factory Defaults gt Restore Now gt A Recycling Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling For more information see e The Notices chapter e The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment e The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle Recycling Lexmark products To return Lexmark products for recycling 1 Visit our Web site at www lexmark com recycle 2 Find the product type you want to recycle and then select your country or region from the list 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Note Printer supplies and hardware not listed in a Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local recycling center Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept Saving money and the environment 222 Recycling Lexmark packaging Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions energy savings and natural resource savings Lexmark cartons are 100 recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist
355. uch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY Load the original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass Troubleshooting 298 MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial e As an alternative dial the telephone number manually Received fax has poor print quality Try one or more of the following RESEND THE DOCUMENT Ask the person who sent you the fax to Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory e Resend the fax There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection e Increase the fax scan resolution if possible REPLACE THE CARTRIDGE When 88 Cartridge lowappears or when the prints appear faded replace the cartridge MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup 3 Inthe Max Sp
356. uch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 88 xx color cartridge low 1 Remove the specified cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the cartridge and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Troubleshooting 285 Notes Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded When the print remains faded replace the cartridge e Have a new cartridge available when the current one no longer prints satisfactorily 88 xx color cartridge nearly low Order a replacement for the specified print cartridge 88 xx Color cartridge very low The specified print cartridge is very low 1 For instructions on replacing a print cartridge from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 29y xx Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job Try one or more of the following Touch Cancel job to cancel the job and clear the message Touch Scan from automatic feeder to resume the scan job from the ADF immediately following the last successfully scanned page e Touch Scan from flatbed to resume the scan job from the scanner glass immediately following the last succ
357. uides e Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same Failure to set the proper size may result in a cropped image e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 From the printer control panel press lt gt to start copying Copying using the ADF 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt change the copy settings gt Copy It Copying 94 Copying using the scanner glass 1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt change the copy settings gt Copy It 3 If you have more pages to scan then place the next document on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the Next Page 4 Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen Copying film photos 1 Place a photo facedown on the upper left corner of the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Content gt Photo gt ZS gt Photo Film gt Ai gt Copy It 3 Touch Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job Copying on specialty media Copy
358. ularly printed Before you can use this application first set it up on the printer For more information see Setting up Forms and Favorites on page 21 1 From the printer home screen navigate to Forms and Favorites gt select the form from the list gt enter the number of copies gt adjust other settings 2 Depending on your printer model touch ZS or Submit Printing a document Printing a document 1 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded 2 Send the print job For Windows users a With a document open click File gt Print b Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup c Adjust the settings if necessary d Click OK gt Print For Macintosh users a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Page Setup 2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded 3 Click OK b Customize the settings in the Print dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the Print dialog and pop up menus adjust the settings if necessary Note To print on a specific paper type adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded or select the appropriate tray or feeder 3 Click Print Printing 85 Printing in black and white From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt Print S
359. umes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape e Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Understanding the printer menus Paper Saver Orientation Auto Landscape Portrait Paper Saver Off 2 Up 3 Up 4 Up 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Paper Saver Border None Solid Paper Saver Ordering Horizontal Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Vertical Separator Sheets Off Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Separator Sheet Source Tray x Manual Feeder Blank Pages Do Not Print Print 201 Specify the orientation of a multiple page document Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer chooses between portrait and landscape Specify that multiple page images be printed on one side of a paper Notes e Off is the factory default setting e The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side Print a border on each page image Note None is the factory default setting Specify the positioning of multiple page images Notes e Horizontal is the factory default setting e Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted Notes e Off is the factory default setting Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print j
360. up Page Shortcut List Fax Job Log Fax Call Log Copy Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Profiles List Print Fonts Print Directory Asset Report Help Print All Guides Copy Guide E mail Guide Fax Guide FTP Guide Print Defects Guide Information Guide Supplies Guide 1 Depending on the printer setup this menu appears as Standard Network or Network x This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed 133 Settings General Settings Copy Settings Fax Settings E mail Settings FTP Settings Flash Drive Menu Print Settings Manage Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Copy Shortcuts Profile Shortcuts Understanding the printer menus 134 Supplies menu Use Replace Supply Reset the supply counter for the replacement All Photoconductors photoconductor or photoconductors Cyan Photoconductor e Select Yes to reset the supply counter Magenta Photoconductor Select No to exit Yellow Photoconductor Note Reset the supply counter manually after replacing a Black Photoconductor photoconductor Cyan Cartridge View the status of the cyan toner cartridge Early Warning Low Invalid Near End of Life Replace Missing Defective OK Unsupported Magenta Cartridge View the status of the magenta toner cartridge Early Warning Low Invalid Near End of Life Replace Missing Defective OK Unsupported Yellow Cartridge View the status of the yellow ton
361. use when printing You can Use both sides of the paper If your printer model supports duplex printing you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper by selecting 2 sided printing from the Print dialog or the Lexmark Toolbar Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by selecting a setting from the Multipage printing N Up section of the Print dialog Check your first draft for accuracy Before printing or making multiple copies of a document e Use the preview feature which you can select from the Print dialog or the Lexmark Toolbar to see how the document will look before you print it e Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy Saving money and the environment 218 Avoid paper jams Carefully select and load paper to avoid paper jams For more information see Avoiding jams on page 253 Saving energy Using Eco Mode 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Eco Mode gt select a setting Use the factory default s
362. vels 251 paper jam 251 Setting up 251 e mail function Setting up 104 e mail screen advanced options 110 options 108 109 110 E mail Settings menu 188 e mail shortcuts creating using the Embedded Web Server 105 e mail sending using a shortcut number 106 using the address book 106 e mailing adding message line 107 adding subject line 107 changing output file type 107 configuring e mail settings 104 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 105 creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 105 setting up e mail function 104 using a shortcut number 106 using the address book 106 using the printer control panel 106 F factory defaults restoring 221 FAQ about color printing 320 fax and e mail functions setting up 295 fax and e mail functions are not set up 295 342 fax connection connecting the printer to the wall jack 113 connecting to a DSL line 113 connecting to a PBX or ISDN 114 fax connections regional adapters 115 fax log viewing 120 Fax memory full 272 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu 187 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 272 fax screen advanced options 122 123 options 121 122 123 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 272 Fax Station Name not set up 272 Fax Station Number not set up 273 fax troubleshooting caller ID is not shown 295 can receive but not send faxes 297 can send but not receive faxes 297 cannot send or receive a fax 295 rec
363. vice Set Identifier SSID is a name assigned to a wireless network Wireless Encryption Protocol WEP and Wi Fi Protected Access WPA are types of security used on a network Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network Note Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network e SSID The SSID is also referred to as the network name e Wireless Mode or Network Mode The mode will be either infrastructure or ad hoc e Channel for ad hoc networks The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select e Security Method There are three basic options for Security Method WEP key If your network uses more than one WEP key then enter up to four in the provided spaces Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key or WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security The choices are AES or TKIP Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network No security If your wireless network does not use any type of security then you will not have an
364. w the printer status release held print jobs create bookmarks and do other print related tasks you might normally do while standing at the network printer 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF gt Remote Operator Panel 3 Select the Enabled check box and then customize the settings 4 Click Apply To use the application from the Embedded Web Server click Applications gt Remote Operator Panel gt Launch VNC Applet Exporting and importing a configuration You can export configuration settings into a text file and then import it to apply the settings to other printers Exporting a configuration to a file 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Click Settings or Configuration Click Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF or click Embedded Solutions From Installed Solutions click the name of the application you want to configure Click Configure gt Export O uu A W N Follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file
365. ware program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating system controls the adjustment of colors e The color conversion tables applied to each object when Color Correction is set to Auto generate preferred colors for the majority of documents To manually apply a different color conversion table 1 From the Quality menu select Color Correction and then select Manual 2 From the Quality menu select Manual Color and then select the appropriate color conversion table for the affected object type Troubleshooting 322 Manual Color menu RGB Image Vivid Produces brighter more saturated colors and may be applied RGB Text to all incoming color formats RGB Graphics sRGB Display Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a computer monitor Black toner usage is optimized for printing photographs Display True Black Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on acomputer monitor Uses only black toner to create all levels of neutral gray sRGB Vivid Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB Display color correction Black usage is optimized for printing business graphics Off No color correction is implemented CMYK Image US CMYK Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP CMYK Text Specifications for Web Offset Publishing color output CMYK Graphics Euro CMYK
366. wo or four consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto a single sheet of paper Notes e The Paper Size must be set to Letter Legal A4 or JIS B5 e The Copy Size must be set to 100 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Paper Saver gt select desired output gt ZS gt Copy It Creating a custom copy job job build The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job Each set may be scanned using different job parameters When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled the scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters and then it scans the next set with the same or different parameters The definition of a set depends on the scan source e f you scan a document on the scanner glass then a set consists of one page e If you scan multiple pages using the ADF then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty e If you scan one page using the ADF then a set consists of one page For example 1 Load an original document faceup s
367. xt graphics and photos e Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other e Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer e Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film e Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine e Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper e Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press e Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document Send As This option sets the output PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS for the scanned image e PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com e Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access e TIFF Creates multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file Th
368. xt Photo Photo Content Source Specify how the original document was produced Color Laser Note Color Laser is the factory default setting Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Black and White Laser Darkness Lighten or darken the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Dial Prefix Enter a dialing prefix such as 99 A numeric entry field is provided Dialing Prefix Rules Establish a dialing prefix rule Prefix Rule x Understanding the printer menus 182 Use ie Automatic Redial Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number 0 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Redial Frequency Specify the number of minutes between redials 1 200 Behind a PABX Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone No Yes Enable ECM Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs Yes Enable Fax Scans Fax files that are scanned at the printer Driver to fax Allow the printer driver to send fax jobs Yes Allow Save as Shortcut Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer Dial Mode Specify the dialing sound either as a tone or a pulse Tone Pulse Max Speed Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 Custom Job scanning Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file On Scan Preview Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs On Bac
369. y PS Standard Network Setup OR Network x Setup Reports Network Card TCP IP IPv6 Wireless AppleTalk 147 rs Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Set the size of the network input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting The value can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and USB buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing This menu only appears when a formatted disk is installed Notes e Off is the factory default setting e On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk e Auto buffers print jobs only when the printer is busy processing data from another input port e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes t
370. y menu items and descriptions Print Mode Color Black Only Color Correction Auto Off Manual Specify whether images are printed in black and white or in color Notes e Color is the factory default setting e The printer driver is capable of overriding this setting Adjust the color output on the printed page Notes Auto is the factory default setting Auto applies different color conversion tables to each object on the printed page Off turns off color correction Manual allows customization of the color tables using the settings available from the Manual Color menu Due to the differences in additive and subtractive colors certain colors that appear on computer monitors are impossible to duplicate on the printed page Understanding the printer menus Use Print Resolution 1200 dpi 4800 CQ Toner Darkness 1 5 Enhance Fine Lines Color Saver RGB Brightness 6 to 6 RGB Contrast 0 5 RGB Saturation 0 5 206 E Specify the printed output resolution Note 4800 CQ is the factory default setting Lighten or darken the printed output Notes e 4 is the factory default setting e Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner e f Print Mode is set to Black Only then a setting of 5 increases toner density and darkness to all print jobs e If Print Mode is set to Color then a setting of 5 is the same as a setting of 4 Enable a print mode preferable for files such as archite
371. y security information Note Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended If you are installing the printer on an 802 1X network using the advanced method then you may need the following e Authentication type e Inner authentication type e 802 1X user name and password e Certificates Note For more information on configuring 802 1X security see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD Installing the printer on a wireless network Windows Before installing the printer on a wireless network make sure Your wireless network is set up and working properly e The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer Additional printer setup 49 1 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn the printer on Make sure the printer and computer are fully on and ready 3 Click Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen 4 Select Wireless connection when asked to choose a connection type 5 From the Wireless Configuration dialog select Guided Setup Recommended Note Choose Advanced Setup only if you want to customize your installation Additional printer setup 50 6 Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer Note After the printer is configured the software will instruct you to disconnect the t
372. ype Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Glossy as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Heavy Glossy as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Labels as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Vinyl Labels as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Bond as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Letterhead as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Preprinted as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Colored as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Light as the paper type e Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menus e Duplex sets the printer default to two sided printing for every print job unless one sided printing is selected from the Print Properties settings in Windows or from the Print Dialog settings in Macintosh e f Duplex is selected then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including one sided print jobs Understanding the printer menus 143 Heavy Loading Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs that specify Duplex Heavy as the paper type Off Rough Cotton Loading
373. ytes Note E mails above the specified size are not sent Send a message when an e mail is greater than the configured size limit Specify a domain name such as a company domain name and then limit e mail destinations to that domain name only Notes e E mail can be sent only to the specified domain e The limit is one domain Define the e mail server path name for example directory path Note The characters lt gt areinvalid entries for a path name Specify the format of the scanned file Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Set the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e mailing Note 1 5 is the factory default setting Specify the content of the original document Note Text Photo is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 190 Use To Content Source Specify how the original document was produced Color Laser Note Color Laser is the factory default setting Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Black and White Laser Specify whether or not copies are printed in color Note On is the factory default setting Resolution Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch 75 dpi Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting 150 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi Darkness Lighten or darken the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specify the orientation of the scanned image Portrait

Lexmark 34TT001 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents